An Introduction of the Eight Parts of Speech, and the Construction of the Same, Compiled and Set Forth by the Commandment of Our Most Gracious Sovereign Lord The King; Concise treatise of all grammar, which our most cultured and distinguished King ordered to be circulated in that name, so that children throughout England would read nothing else but this one

Document TypeTranslation
CodeLily
PrinterThomas Berthelet
Typeprint
Year1542
PlaceLondon
Other editions:
  • semi-diplomatic
  • modernised

An Introduction of the Eight Parts of Speech, and the Construction of the Same, Compiled and Set Forth by the Commandment of Our Most Gracious Sovereign Lord The King.

Anno MDXLII. {n. p.}

 

Henry the VIII by the grace of God King of England, France, and Ireland, defender of the faith, and of the Church of England, and also of Ireland, in earth the supreme Head, to all schoolmasters and teachers of grammar within this his realm, greeting. Among the manifold business and most weighty affairs appertaining to our regal authority and office, we forget not the tender babes and the youth of our realm, whose good education and godly bringing up is a great furniture to the same and cause of much goodness. And to the intent that hereafter they may the more readily and easily attain the rudimentes of the Latin tongue without the great hindrance, which heretofore hath been through the diversity of grammars and teachings, we will and command, and straightly charge all you schoolmasters and teachers of grammar within this our realm, and other our dominions, as ye intend to avoid our displeasure and have our favour to teach and learn your scholars this English introduction here ensuing, and the Latin grammar annexed to the same and none other, which we have caused for your ease and your scholars speedy preferment briefly and plainly to be compiled and set forth. Fail not to apply your scholars in learning and godly education. {n. p.}

 

To the Reader.

Albeit this realm of England hath just cause to think itself most bounden to the goodness of God, for manifold and sundry benefits received of his inestimable bountifulness, yet if we will weigh the just value of things in an equal balance, as a certain wise philosopher did, which affirmed that realm to be most happy, where as either a wise and a learned man had the rule, or the ruler applied himself to wisdom and learning, we may perceive us Englishmen in nothing so fortunate as in that we have a King and governor, both of excellent wisdom, learning and virtue, and also of great study and diligence to increase the same, whose kingly qualities, when they shall hereafter by such godly monuments, as His Majesty shall leave behind him, appear so plainly to his posterity as we now presently see things, many of them already done, some indoing, and more shall see, which His Majesty by the grace of God, intendeth hereafter to do: out of question all that have gone before him, may well appear but shadows. And to leave the large fields of his princely acts, wherein the wisest and best learned might walk till wit and eloquence were both weary, what constant judgement and what profound knowledge hath His Majesty showed and declared to all the world, in this variety of judgementes and learnings? And what pains, study and travail doth he take, to bring things far out of square to a conformity, and to take good heed of Christ’s church to lead his flock into {n. p.} the fold of true doctrine, the hurdles of the same so well underpight that the wolves shall not be able to overthrow them? And as His Majesty purposeth to establish his people in one consent and harmony of pure and true religion, so his tender goodness toward the youth and childhood of his realm, intendeth to have it brought up under one absolute and uniform sort of learning. For His Majesty considering the great encumbrance and confusion of the young and tender wits, by reason of the diversity of grammar rules and teachings (for heretofore every master had his grammar, and every school diverse teachings, and changing of masters and schools did many times utterly dull and undo good wits) hath appointed certain learned men met for such a purpose, to compile one brief, plain, and uniform grammar, which only (all other set apart) for the more speediness, and less trouble of young wits, His Highness hath commanded all schoolmasters and teachers of grammar within this his realm and other his dominions to teach their scholars. Now consider you fathers in this realm, how much ye be bound to such a gracious King, whose care is not only for you, but for your posterity also, and your tender babes. And you schoolmasters of England, to whom the cure and education of tender youth is committed, with what great study and diligence ought you to follow the example of Our Most Gracious Sovereign? Which among the infinite business appertaining to his regal office, so earnestly mindeth the well bringing up of youth in learning and virtue? How glad, how desirous ought you to be, not only to do this his gracious commandment {n. p.} but also busily to apply yourselves to trade and bring up your scholars in good manners, in knowledge of tongues and sciences? And somewhat to declare unto you the condition and quality of this grammar, ye shall understand, that the eight parts of speech, and the construction of the same, be not here set forth in English at large, but compendiously and briefly for the weak capacity of young and tender wits. And therefore, if anything seemeth here to want in these English introductions, ye shall understand it was left out of purpose, and shall be supplied in the Latin rules made for the same intent, which children shall be apt to learn, what time they shall have competent understanding by these former rudiments. You tender babes of England, shake off slothfulness, set wantonness apart, apply your wits holy to learning and virtue, whereby you may do your duty to God and your King, make glad your parents, profit yourselves and much advance the commonwealth of your country. Let noble Prince Edward encourage your tender hearts, a Prince of great towardness, a Prince in whom God hath poured his graces abundantly, a Prince framed of such perfectness of nature, that he is like by the grace of God to ensue the steps of his father’s wisdom, learning, and virtue, and is now almost in a readiness to run in the same race of learning with you. For whom ye have great cause to pray that he may be the son of a long living father.

 

 

Learn diligently

 

Love God entirely

{n. p.}

 

Hexasticon to the boys of England.

Oh little boy, your glory is not little, the King is the one who

provides for the great benefits of your studies.

The King is great to you, little boy, the King willingly

offers the sweet cups of nectarean grammar.

Take the very sweet cups of the generous King,

drink them, you will drain them with an eager mouth.

 

God save the King {n. p.}

 

An Introduction of the Eight Parts of Speech. In speech be these eight parts following:

 

noun

 

 

 

adverb

 

 

undeclined

pronoun

declined

conjunction

verb

 

preposition

participle

 

interjection

 

 

Of the Noun

A noun is the name of a thing that may be seen, felt, heard or understand. As the name of my hand in Latin is manus, the name of a house is domus, the name of goodness is bonitas.

Of nouns some be substantives some be adjectives.

A noun substantive is that standeth by himself and requireth not another word to be joined with him, as homo, “a man”, and it is declined with one article, as hic magister, “a master”, or with two, as hic and haec parens, “a father or mother”.

A noun adjective is that cannot stand by himself, bur requireth to be joined with another word, as bonus, “good”, pulcher, “fair”. And it is declined either with three terminations, as bonus, bona, bonum, or else with three articles, as hic, haec and hoc felix, “happy”, hic and haec levis, and hoc leve, “light”.

A noun substantive, either is proper to the thing that it betokeneth, as Eduardus is my proper name, {n. p.} or it is common to more, as homo is a common name to all men.

 

Numbers of Nouns

In nouns be two numbers, the singular and the plural. The singular number speaketh of one, as lapis, “a stone”. The plural number speaketh of more than one, as lapides, “stones”.

 

Cases of Nouns

Nouns be declined with six cases singularly and plurally: the nominative, the genitive, the dative, the accusative, the vocative, and the ablative.

The nominative case cometh before the verb, and answereth to this question, “who or what?”, as magister docet, “the master teacheth”.

The genitive case is known by this token of, and answereth to this question, “whose or whereof?”, as doctrina magistri, “the learning of the master”.

The dative case is known by this token to, and answereth to this question, “to whom or to what?”, as do librum magistro, “I give a book to the master”.

The accusative case followeth the verb, and answereth to this question, “whom or what?”, as amo magistrum, “I love the master”.

The vocative case is known by calling or speaking to, as o magister, “o master”.

The ablative case is commonly known by these signs, “in”, “with”, “through”, “for”, “from”, “by”, and “than”, as cum magistro, “with the master”.

 

Articles

Articles be borrowed of the pronoun, and be thus declined {n. p.}

 

 

 

Singular

 

nominative hic, haec, hoc

 

 

nominative hi, hae, haec

genitive huius

Plural

genitive horum, harum, horum

dative huic

 

dative his

accusative hunc, hanc, hoc

 

accusative hos, has, haec

vocative missing

 

vocative missing

ablative hoc, hac, hoc

 

ablativo his

 

Genders of Nouns

Genders of nouns be seven: the masculine, the feminine, the neuter, the common of two, the common of three, the doubtful, and the epicene.

The masculine gender is declined with this article hic, as hic vir, “a man”.

The feminine gender is declined with this article haec, as haec mulier, “a woman”.

The neuter is declined with this article hoc, as hoc saxum, “a stone”.

The common of two is declined with hic and haec, as hic and haec parens.

The common of three is declined with hic, haec and hoc, as hic, haec and hoc felix.

The doubtful gender is declined with hic or haec, as hic or haec dies, “a day”.

The epicene gender is declined with one article, and under that one article, both kinds be signified, as hic passer, “a sparrow”, haec aquila, “an eagle”, both he and she.

 

The Declensions of Nouns

There be five declensions of nouns.

The first is when the genitive and the dative case singular end in ae diphthong, the accusative in am, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in a, {B} the nominative plural in ae diphthong, the genitive in arum, the dative in is, the accusative in as, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in is, as in example:

 

 

 

nominative haec musa

 

 

 

 

 

nominative hae musae

 

genitive huius musae

 

genitive harum musarum

Singular

dative huic musae

Plural

dative his musis

 

accusative hanc musam

 

accusative has musas

 

vocative o musa

 

vocative o musae

 

ablative ab hac musa

 

ablative ab his musis

The second is when the genitive case singular endeth in i, the dative in o, the accusative in um, the vocative for the most part like the nominative, the ablative in o. The nominative plural in i, the genitive in orum, the dative in is, the accusative in os, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in is, as in example:

 

 

 

nominative hic magister

 

 

nominative hi magistri

 

genitive huius magistri

 

genitive horum magistrorum

Singular

dative huic magistro

Plural

dative his magistris

 

accusative hunc magistrum

 

accusative hos magistros

 

vocative o magister

 

vocative o magistri

 

ablative ab hoc magistro

 

ablative ab his magistris

 

Here is to be noted that when the nominative endeth in us, the vocative shall end in e, as nominative hic dominus, vocative o domine. Except filius, that maketh o fili, and deus, that maketh o deus. When the nominative endeth in ius, if it be a proper name of a man, the vocative shall end in i, as nominative hic Georgius, vocative o Georgi. {n. p.}

Note also that all nouns of the neuter gender, of what declension so ever they be, have the nominative, the accusative, and the vocative like in both numbers. And in the plural number they end all in a, as in example:

 

 

 

nominative hoc regnum

 

 

nominative haec regna

 

genitive huius regni

 

genitive horum regnorum

Singular

dative huic regno

Plural

dative his regnis

 

accusative hoc regnum

 

accusative haec regna

 

vocative o regnum

 

vocative o regna

 

ablative ab hoc regno

 

ablative ab his regnis

 

Except ambo and duo, which make the neuter gender in o, and be thus declined:

 

 

 

nominative ambo, ambae, ambo

 

genitive amborum, ambarum, amborum

Plural

dative ambobus, ambabus, ambobus

 

accusative ambos, ambas, ambo

 

vocative ambo, ambae, ambo

 

ablative ambobus, ambabus, ambobus

likewise duo

 

The third is when the genitive case singular endeth in is, the dative in i, the accusative most commonly in em, and sometimes in im, and sometimes in both, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in i, sometimes in e, sometimes in both. The nominative case plural in es, the genitive sometimes in um, and sometime in ium, the dative in bus, the accusative in es, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in bus, as in example: {B. ii.}

 

 

 

nominative hic lapis

 

 

nominative hi lapides

 

genitive huius lapidis

 

genitive horum lapidum

Singular

dative huic lapidi

Plural

dative his lapidibus

 

accusative hunc lapidem

 

accusative hos lapides

 

vocative o lapis

 

vocative o lapides

 

ablative ab hoc lapide

 

ablative ab his lapidibus

 

 

 

 

 

nominative hic and haec parens

 

nominative hi and hae parentes

 

genitive huius parentis

 

genitive horum and harum parentum

 

dative huic parenti

 

dative his parentibus

Singular

accusative hunc and hanc parentem

Plural

accusative hos and has parentes

 

vocative o parens

 

vocative o parentes

 

ablative ab hoc and hac parente

 

ablative ab his parentibus

 

The fourth is when the genitive case singular endeth in us, the dative in ui, the accusative in um, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in u. The nominative plural in us, the genitive in uum, the dative in ibus, the accusative in us, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in ibus, as in example:

 

 

 

nominative hec manus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

nominative hae manus

 

genitive huius manus

 

genitive harum manuum

Singular

dative huic manui

Plural

dative his manibus

 

accusative hanc manum

 

accusative has manus

 

vocative o manus

 

vocative o manus

 

ablative ab hac manu

 

ablative ab his manibus

 

 

 

The fifth is when the genitive and the dative case singular end in ei, the accusative in em, the vocative like the nominative, the ablative in e. The nominative plural in es, the genitive in erum, the dative in ebas, the accusative in es, the vocative like the nominative, {n. p.} the ablative in ebus, as in example:

 

 

 

nominative hic meridies

 

 

nominative hi meridies

 

genitive huius meridiei

 

genitive horum meridierum

Singular

dative huic meridiei

Plural

dative his meridiebus

 

accusative hunc meridiem

 

accusative hos meridies

 

vocative o meridies

 

vocative o meridies

 

ablative ab hoc meridie

 

ablative ab his meridiebus

 

The Declining of Adjectives

A noun adjective of three terminations is thus declined:

 

 

 

nominative bonus, bona, bonum

 

 

nominative boni, bonae, bona

 

genitive boni, bonae, boni

 

genitive bonorum, bonarum, bonorum

Singular

dative bono, bonae, bono

Plural

dative bonis

 

accusative bonum, bonam, bonum

 

accusative bonos, bonas, bona

 

vocative bone, bona, bonum

 

vocative boni, bonae, bona

 

ablative bono, bona, bono

 

ablative bonis

 

There be besides these certain nouns adjectives of another manner of declining, which make the genitive case singular in ïus or ius, and the dative in i, which be these that follow with their compounds:

 

 

 

nominative unus, una, unum

 

 

nominative uni, unae, una

 

genitive unius

 

genitive unorum, unarum, unorum

Singular

dative uni

Plural

dative unis

 

accusative unum, nam, num

 

accusative unos, unas, una

 

vocative une, una, unum

 

vocative uni, unae, una

 

ablative uno, una, uno

 

ablative unis

 

In like manner be declined totus, solus, and also ullus, alius, alter, uter, and neuter, except that these five last rehearsed lack the vocative case. {n. p.}

A noun adjective of three articles is thus declined:

 

 

 

nominative hic, haec, and hoc felix

 

 

nominative hi and hae felices, and haec felicia

 

genitive huius felicis

 

genitive horum, harum, and horum felicium

Singular

dative huic felici

Plural

dative his felicibus

 

accusative hunc, hanc felicem and hoc felix

 

accusative hos and has felices and haec felicia

 

vocative o felix

 

vocative o felices and felicia

 

ablative ab hoc, hac, hoc felice or felici

 

ablative ab his felicibus

 

 

 

 

 

nominative hic, haec tristis and hoc triste

 

nominative hi and hae tristes and hec tristia

 

genitive huius tristis

 

genitive horum, harum, and horum tristium

Singular

dative huic tristi

Plural

dative his trisibus

 

accusative hunc, hanc tristem, and hoc triste

 

accusative hos and has tristes and haec tristia

 

vocative o tristis and o triste

 

vocative o tristes and o tristia

 

ablative ab hoc, hac and hoc tristi

 

ablative ab his tristibus

 

Comparisons of Nouns

Adjectives, whose signification may increase, or be diminished, receive comparison.

There be three degrees of comparisons:

 

 

the positive

the comparative

and the superlative

 

The positive betokeneth the thing absolutely without excess, as durus, “hard”. {n. p.}

The comparative exceedeth somewhat his positive in signification, as durior, “harder”, and it is formed of the first case of his positive, that endeth in i, by putting thereto or, and us, as of duri, hic and haec durior and hoc durius, of tristi, hic and haec trstior, and hoc tristius, of dulci, hic and haec dulcior and hoc dulcius.

The superlative exceedeth his positive in the highest degree, as durissimus, “hardest”, and it is formed of the first case of his positive that endeth in i, by putting thereto s and simus, as duri, durissimus, tristi, tristissimus, dulci, dulcissimus.

From these general rules be excepted these that follow:

 

 

bonus

 

malus

 

melior

peior

 

optimus

pessimus

 

 

magnus

 

parvus

 

multus plurimus

maior

minor

multa plurima

maximus

minimus

multum plus plurimum

 

And if the positive end in r, the superlative is formed of the nominative case by putting to rimus, as pulcher pulcherrimus.

Also these nouns ending in lis, make the superlative by changing is into limus, as humilis, humillimus, similis simillimus, facilis, facillimus, gracilis, gracillimus, agilis, agillimus, docilis, docillimus.

All other nouns ending in lis do follow the general rule afore going. {n. p.}

 

Of the Pronoun.

A pronoun is a part of speech much like a noun, which is used in showing or rehearsing.

There be fifteen pronouns: ego, tu, sui, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras.

To these may be added their compounds, as egomet, tute, idem, and also qui, quae, quod.

These eight pronouns, ego, tu, sui, ille, ipse, iste, hic, and is be primitives, so called for because they be not derived of other. And they be also called demonstratives because they show a thing not spoken of before.

And these six, hic, ille, iste, is, idem, and qui be relatives because they rehearse a thing that was spoken of before.

These seven, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, and vestras be derivatives, for they be derived of their primitives, mei, tui, sui, nostri, and vestri.

There belongeth to a pronoun these five things: number, case, and gender as are in a noun, declension, and person, as here followeth.

 

The Declensions of Pronouns.

There be four declensions of pronouns.

These three ego, tu, sui be of the first declension, and be thus declined: {n. p.}

 

 

 

nominative ego

 

 

nominative nos

 

genitive mei

 

genitive nostrum or nostri

Singular

dative mihi

Plural

dative nobis

 

accusative me

 

accusative nos

 

vocative missing

 

vocative missing

 

ablative a me

 

ablative a nobis

 

 

 

 

 

nominative tu

 

nominative vos

 

genitive tui

 

genitive vestrum or vestri

Singular

dative tibi

Plural

dative vobis

 

accusative te

 

accusative vos

 

vocative o tu

 

vocative o vos

 

ablative a te

 

ablative a vobis

 

 

 

 

 

nominative missing

 

nominative missing

 

genitive sui

 

genitive sui

Singular

dative sibi

Plural

dative sibi

 

accusative se

 

accusative se

 

vocative missing

 

vocative missing

 

ablative a se

 

ablative a se

 

These six ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, and qui be of the second declension, and be thus declined:

 

 

 

nominative iste, ista, istud

 

 

nominative isti, istae, ista

 

genitive istius

 

genitive istorum, istarum, istorum

Singular

dative isti

Plural

dative istis

 

accusative istum, istam, istud

 

accusative istos, istas, ista

 

vocative missing

 

vocative missing

 

ablative isto ista isto

 

ablative istis

 

Ille is declined like iste, and also ipse, except that the neuter gender in the nominative case and in the accusative case singular maketh ipsum.

Nominative hic, haec, hoc, genitive huius, as afore in the noun. {C}

 

 

 

nominative is, ea, id

 

 

nominative ii, eae, ea

 

genitive eius

 

genitive eorum, earum, eorum

Singular

dative ei

Plural

dative iis or eis

 

accusative eum, eam, id

 

accusative eos, eas, ea

 

vocative missing

 

vocative missing

 

ablative eo ea eo

 

ablative iis or eis

 

 

 

 

 

qui

 

 

 

 

 

 

qui

 

nominative

quae

 

 

nominative

quae

 

 

quod

 

 

 

quae

 

genitive cuius

 

 

 

 

quorum

 

dative cui

 

 

 

genitive

quarum

Singular

 

quem

Plural

 

quorum

 

accusative

quam

 

 

dative quibus or queis

 

 

 

quod

 

 

 

quos

 

vocative missing

 

 

 

accusative

quas

 

 

quo

 

 

 

quae

 

ablative

qua

or qui

vocative missing

 

 

 

quo

 

 

ablative quibus or queis

 

 

Likewise quis and quid be declined whether they be interrogatives or indefinites.

Where note that quid is always a substantive of the neuter gender.

These five meus, tuus, suus, noster, and vester, be of the third declension, and be declined as nouns adjectives of three terminations, in this wise:

 

 

 

nominative meus, mea, meum

 

 

nominative mei, meae, mea

 

genitive mei, meae, mei

 

genitive meorum, mearum, meorum

Singular

dative meo, meae, meo

Plural

dative meis

 

accusative meum, meam, meum

 

accusative meos, meas, mea

 

vocative mi, mea, meum

 

vocative mei, meae, mea

 

ablative meo, mea, meo

 

ablative meis

{n. p.}

 

So is noster declined, and tuus, suus, vester except that these three last do lack the vocative case.

Nostras, vestras and this noun cuias, be of the fourth declension, and be thus declined:

 

 

 

nominative hic and haec nostras and hoc nostrate

 

 

nominative hi and hae nostrates and haec nostratia

 

genitive huius nostratis

 

genitive horum, harum, horum nostratium

Singular

dative huic nostrati

Plural

dative his nostratibus

 

accusative hunc, hanc nostratem and hoc nostrate

 

accusative hos and has nostrates and haec nostrati

 

vocative o nostras and o nostrate

 

vocative o nostrates and o nostratia

 

ablative ab hoc, hac, and hoc nostrate or nostrati

 

ablative ab his nostratibus

 

Here is to be noted that nostras, vestras, and this noun cuias be called gentiles, because they properly betoken pertaining to countries or nations, to sects or factions.

 

A pronoun hath three persons.

The first speaketh of himself, as ego, “I”, nos, “we”.

The second person is spoken to, as tu, “thou”, vos, “ye”.

And of this person is also every vocative case.

The third person is spoken of, as ille, “he”, illi, “they”.

And therefore all nouns, pronouns, and participles be of the third person.

 

Of a Verb

A verb is a part of speech, declined with mode and tense, betokening to do, as amo, “I love”, to suffer, as amor, “I am loved” or to be, as sum, “I am”.

Of verbs such as have persons be called {C. ii.} personals, as ego amo, tu amas. And such as have no persons, be called impersonals, as taedet, “it irketh”, oportet, “it behoveth”.

Of verbs personals there be five kinds: active, passive, neuter, deponent, and common.

A verb active endeth in o, as amo, and by putting to r, may be a passive, as amor.

A verb passive endeth in or, as amor, and by putting away r, may be an active, as amo.

A verb neuter endeth in o or m, and can not take r to make him a passive, as curro, “I run”, sum, “I am”.

A verb deponent endeth in r, and yet in signification is active, as loquor verbum, “I speak a word”, or neuter, as glorior, “I boast”.

A verb common endeth in r, and in signification is both active and passive, as osculor te, “I kiss thee”, osculor a te, “I am kissed of thee”.

 

Modes

There be six modes: the indicative, the imperative, the optative, the potential, the subjunctive, and the infinitive.

The indicative mode showeth a reason true or false, as ego amo, “I love”, or else asketh a question, as amas tu? “Dost thou love?”.

The imperative biddeth, or commandeth, as ama, “love thou”.

The optative wisheth or desireth with these signs “would God”, “I pray God”, or “God grant”, as utinam amem, “I pray God I love”.

The potential mode is known by these signs “may”, “can”, “might”, “would”, “should”, or “ought”, as amem, “I can or may love”. {n. p.}

The subjunctive joineth sentences together, as cum amarem eram miser, “when I loved I was a wretch”.

The infinitive signifieth doing, suffering, or being, and hath neither number nor person nor nominative case before him, and is known commonly by this sign “to”, as amare, “to love”. Also when two verbs come together without any nominative case between them, then the later shall be the infinitive mode, as cupio discere, “I desire to learn”.

There be moreover belonging to the infinitive mode of verbs certain voices called gerundes ending in di, do, and dum, and have both the active and passive signification, as amandi, “of loving” or “of being loved”, amando, “in loving” or “in being loved”, amandum, “to love” or “to be loved”.

There be also pertaining unto verbs two supines, the one ending in tum, which is called the first supine because it hath the signification of the verb active, as eo amatum, “I go to love”. And the other in tu, which is called the later supine because it hath for the most part the signification passive, as difficilis amatu, “hard to be loved”.

 

Tenses

There be five tenses or times: the present tense, the preterimperfect tense, the preterperfect, the preterpluperfect, and the future tense.

The present tense speaketh of the time that now is, as amo, “I love”.

The preterimperfect tense speaketh of the time not perfectly past, as amabam, “I loved” or “did love”.

The preterperfect tense speaketh of the time perfectly {C. iii.} past, with this sign “have”, as amavi, “I have loved”.

The preterpluperfect tense speaketh of the time more than perfectly past, with this sign “had”, as amaveram, “I had loved”.

The future tense speaketh of the time to come with this sign “shall” or “will”, as amabo, “I shall or will love”.

 

Persons

There be also in verbs three persons in both numbers, as singular ego amo “I love”, tu amas “thou lovest”, ille amat “he loveth”. Plural: nos amamus, “we love”, vos amatis “ye love”, illi amant, “they love”.

 

Conjugations

Verbs have four conjugations, which be known after this manner:

The first conjugation hath a long before re and ris, as amare, amaris.

The second conjugation hath e long before re and ris, as docere, doceris.

The third conjugation hath e short before re and ris, as legere, legeris.

The fourth conjugation hath i long before re and ris, as audire, audiris.

 

Verbs in o of the four conjugations, be declined after these examples:

Amo, as, amavi, amare, amandi, amando, amandum, amatum, amatu, amans, amaturus, “to love”.

Doceo, doces, docui, docere, docendi, docendo, docendum, doctum, doctu, docens, docturus, “to teach”.

Lego, legis, legi, legere, legendi, legendo, legendum, lectum, lectu, legens, lecturus, “to read”.

Audio, audis, audivi, audire, audiendi, audiendo, audiendum, auditum, auditu, audiens, auditurus, “to hear”. {n. p.}

 

Indicative

mode the present tense

singular

I love

 

thou lovest

 

he loveth

 

 

 

we love

 

ye love

 

they love

amo

amas

amat

 

amamus

amatis

amant

doceo

doces

docet

Plural

docemus

docetis

docent

lego

legis

legit

 

legimus

legitis

legunt

audio

audis

audit

 

audimus

auditis

audiunt

 

The preterimperfect tense singular

amabam

 

I loved or did love

docebam

 

taught

 

bas, bat. Plural, bamus, batis, bant

legebam

 

read

 

audiebam

 

 

heard



The preterperfect tense singular

amavi

I have loved

docui

 

taught

 

isti, it. Plural imus, istis, erunt or ere

legi

 

read

 

audivi

 

 

heard

 

 

The preterpluperfect tense singular

amaveram

 

I had loved

docueram

 

taught

 

ras, rat. Plural ramus, ratis, rant

legeram

 

read

 

audiveram

 

 

heard



The future tense singular

amabo

 

I shall or will love

docebo

bis, bit. Plural bimus, bitis, bunt

 

 

teach

legam

 

read

 

es, et. Plural emus, etis, ent

 

audiam

 

hear

 

Imperative mode the present tense singular

love thou

love he, or

let him love

love we, or

let us love

love ye

love they, or

let them love

ama

amet

amemus

amate

ament

amato

amato

amatote

amanto

teach

thou

teach he, or

let him teach

teach we, or

let us teach

teach ye

teach they, or

let them teach

doce

doceat

doceamus

 

docete

doceant

doceto

doceto

docetote

docento

lege

 

legat

Plural

 

legite

legant

legito

legito

legamus

legitote

legunto

{n. p.}

 

audi

 

audiat

 

audiamus

 

audite

 

audiant

audito

audito

auditote

audiunto

 

Optative mode

the present tense singular

 

utinam

 

God grant I love

 

amem, ames, amet. Plural utinam amemus, ametis, ament

doceam

 

 

legam

as, at. Plural utinam amus, atis, ant

audiam

 

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

utinam

amarem

 

would God I loved

docerem

 

legerem

res, ret. Plural utinam remus, retis, rent

audirem

 

 

Preterperfect tense singular

utinam

amaverim

 

I pray God I have loved

docuerim

 

legerim

ris, rit. Plural utinam rimus, ritis, rint

audiverim

 

 

Preterpluperfect

tense singular

utinam

amavissem

 

would God I had loved

docuissem

 

legissem

ses, set. Plural utinam semus, setis, sent

audivissem

 

 

Future tense singular

utinam

amavero

 

God grant I love hereafter

docuero

 

legero

ris, rit. Plural utinam rimus, ritis, rint

audivero

 

 

 

 

I may or can love

 

Potential mode present tense singular

amem, ames, amet. Plural amemus, ametis, ament

doceam

 

 

legam

as, at. Plural amus, atis, ant

audiam

 

{n. p.}

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

amarem

 

I might or could love

docerem

 

teach

 

res, ret. Plural remus, retis, rent

legerem

 

read

 

audirem

 

 

hear

 

Preterperfect tense singular

amaverim

 

I might, should or ought to have loved

docuerim

 

taught

 

ris, rit. Plural rimus, ritis, rint

legerim

 

read

 

audiverim

 

 

heard

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

amavissem

 

I might should or ought to had loved

docuissem

 

taught

 

ses, set. Plural semus, setis, sent

legissem

 

read

 

audivissem

 

 

heard

 

Future tense singular

amavero

 

I may or can love hereafter

docuero

 

teach

 

ris, rit. Plural rimus, ritis, rint

legero

 

read

 

audivero

 

 

hear

 

 

 

when I love

Conjunctive mode present singular

 

 

cum

amem, ames, amet. Plural amemus, ametis, ament

doceam

 

teach

legam

as, at. Plural amus, atis, ant.

read

audiam

 

hear

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

 

cum

amarem

 

when I loved or did love

docerem

 

taught or did teach

legerem

res, ret. Plural remus, retis, rent

audirem

 

read or did read

 

 

 

 

heard or did hear

 

Preterperfect tense singular

 

 

cum

amaverim

 

when I have loved

docuerim

 

taught

 

ris, rit. Plural rimus, ritis, rint

legerim

 

read

 

audiverim

 

 

heard

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

 

cum

amavissem

 

when I had loved

docuissem

 

taught

 

ses, set. Plural semus, setis, sent

legissem

 

read

 

audivissem

 

 

heard

{D. i.}

 

Future tense singular

 

cum

amavero

 

when I shall or will love

docuero

 

teach

 

ris, rit. Plural rimus, ritis, rint

legero

 

read

 

audivero

 

 

hear

 

Infinitive

mode present and preterimperfect tense

amare

 

to love

docere

teach

legere

read

audire

hear

 

Preterperfect and preterpluperfect

tense

amavisse

 

to have or had loved

docuisse

to have or had taught

legisse

to have or had read

audivisse

to have or had heard

 

Future tense

amaturum esse

 

to love hereafter

docturum esse

to teach hereafter

lecturum esse

to read hereafter

auditurum esse

to hear in time to come

 

Gerunds

 

amandi

of loving

amando

in loving

amandum

to love

docendi

of teaching

docendo

in teaching

docendum

to teach

legendi

of reading

legendo

in reading

legendum

to read

audiendi

of hearing

audiendo

in hearing

audiendum

to hear

 

Supines

 

amatum

to love

 

amatu

to be loved

doctum

to teach

doctu

to be taught

lectum

to read

lectu

to be read

auditum

to hear

auditu

te be heard

 

Participle

present

 

amans

 

loving

docens

teaching

legens

reading

audiens

hearing

{n. p.}

 

Participle

future

 

amaturus

to love or about to love

docturus

to teach or about to teach

lecturus

to read or about to read

auditurus

to hear or about to hear

 

Here before we decline any verbs in or, for supplying of many tenses lacking in all such verbs, we must learn to decline this verb sum, in this wise:

 

Indicative mode present tense

singular

sum, es, fui, esse, futurus

sum I am, es, est. Plural sumus, estis, sunt

Preterimperfect singular

eram, I was, eras, erat. Plural eramus, eratis, erant

Preterperfect tense

fui, I have been, fuisti, fuit. Plural fuimus, fuistis, fuerunt or fuere

Preterpluperfect tense singular

fueram, I had been, fueras, fuerat. Plural fueramus, fueratis, fuerant

Future tense singular

ero, I shall or will be, eris, erit. Plural eriums, eritis, erunt

 

Imperative mode

present tense

singular

Optative mode present singular

Preterimperfect singular

Preterperfect tense singular

Preterpluperfect tense singular

 

 

sis

 

 

 

 

sitis

 

sint

 

es

be thou sit

Plural simus este

sunto

 

esto

 

esto

 

estote

 

utinam

sim, I pray God I be, sis, sit. Plural simus, sitis, sint

 

 

utinam

essem, I would God I were, esses, esset. Plural essemus,

 

 

essetis, essent

utinam

fuerim, I pray God I have been, fueris, fuerit. Plural fuerimus,

 

 

fueritis, fuerint

utinam

fuissem, would God I had been, fuisses, ses, set. Plural fuissemus,

 

 

fuissetis, fuissent

{D. ii.}

 

Future tense singular

utinam

fuero, God grant I be hereafter, fueris, fuerit. Plural

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

 

Potential mode present

tense singular

Preterimperfect tense

singular

sim, I may or can be, sis, sit. Plural simus, sitis sint

 

essem, I might or coulde be, esses, esset. Plural essemus,

essetis, essent

 

Preterperfect tense singular

utinam

fuerim, I might should or ought to have been, fueris,

fuerit. Plural fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

utinam

fuissem, I might should or ought to had been, fuisses,

fuisset. Plural fuissemus, fuissetis, fuissent

 

Future tense singular

utinam

fuero, I may be hereafter, fueris, fuerit. Plural fuerimus,

fueritis, fuerint

 

Conjunctive mode present singular

Preterimperfect singular

Preterperfect tense singular Preterpluperfecte tense singular

cum

sim, when I am, sis, sit. Plural simus, sitis, sint

 

essem, when I was, esses, esset. Plural essemus, essetis, essent

 

 

fuerim, when I have been, fueris, fuerit. Plural fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

 

fuissem, when I had been, fuisses, fuisset. Plural fuissemus, fuissetis, fuissent

cum

cum

cum

Future tense singular

cum

fuero, when I shall or will be, fueris, fuerit. Plural

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

 

Infinitive mode present and imperfect tense

 

 

preterperfect

 

 

 

to have

esse, to be

and

preterpluperfect

fuisse

or had been

Future tense, fore or futurum esse, to be hereafter

{n. p.}

 

Verbs in or of the four conjugations be declined after these examples:

 

 

amor, amaris or amare, amatus sum or fui, amari, amatus, amandus

doceor, doceris or docere, doctus sum or fui, doceri, doctus, docendus

legor, legeris or legere, lectus sum or fui, legi, lectus, legendus

audior, auditis or audire, auditus sum or fui, audiri, auditus, audiendus

 

Indicative mode present tense singular

amor amaris, or amare, amatur

 

I am loved

doceor, doceris, or docere, docetur

I am taught

 

Plural mur, mini, tur

legor, legeris, or legere, legitur

I am read

audior, audiris, or audire, auditur

I am heard

 

The preterimperfect tense singular

amabar

 

I was loved

docebar

 

taught

 

baris, or bare, batur. Plural bamur, mini, tur

legebar

 

read

audibar

 

heard

 

The preterperfect tense singular

amatus

 

I have been loved

 

tus es or fuisti, tus est or

fuit. Plural ti sumus or imus, ti estis or istis, ti sunt fuerunt or fuere

doctus

 

taught

 

sum or fui

lectus

 

read

auditus

 

heard

 

The preterpluperfect tense singular

amatus

 

I have been loved

 

tus eras or fueras, tus erat

or fuerat. Plural ti eramus or fueramus, ti eratis or fueratis, ti erant or fuerant

doctus

 

taught

 

eram or fueram

lectus

 

read

auditus

 

heard

 

The future

tense singular

amabor

 

I shall or will be loved

docebor

beris or ere, bitur, bimur, bimini, buntur

 

 

taught

legar

 

read

 

eris or ere, etur. Plural emur, emini, entur

audiar

 

heard

{D. iii.}

 

Imperative mode

present tense

singular

be thou

loved

 

let him

be loved

 

let us be

loved

be ye loved

 

let them be

loved

 

amare

ametur

Plural amemur

amamini

amentur

amator

amator

amaaminor

amantor

docere

doceatur

Plural doceamur

docemini

doceantur

docetor

docetor

doceminor

docentor

legere

legatur

Plural

legamur

legemini

legantur

legitor

legitor

legeminor

leguntor

audire

audiatur

Plural audiamur

audimini

audiantur

auditor

auditor

audimino

audiunto

 

 

 

God grant I be loved

Optative

mode the present tense

singular

utinam

amer, ameris or amere, ametur. Plural amemur, amemini, amentur

docear

 

 

taught

legar

aris, are, atur. Plural amur, amini, antur

read

audiar

 

heard

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

amarer

 

would God I were loved

docerer

 

taught

 

eris or ere, etur. Plural remur, remini, rentur

legerer

 

read

audirer

 

heard

 

Preterperfect tense singular

 

utinam

amatus

 

would God I have been loved

doctus

sim or fuerim, sis or fueris, tus sit or fuerit.

lectus

Plural ti simus or fuerimus, ti sitis or

auditus

fueritis, ti sint or fuerint

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

 

utinam

amatus

 

would God I had been loved

doctus

essem or fuissem, tus esses or fuisses, tus esset

lectus

or fuisset. Plural ti essemus or fuissemus, ti

auditus

essetis or fuissetis, ti essent or fuissent

 

Future tense singular

 

utinam

amatus

 

God grant I be loved hereafter

doctus

ero or fuero, tus eris or fueris, tus erit or

lectus

fuerit. Plural ti erimus or fuerimus, ti eritis

auditus

or fueritis, ti erunt or fuerint

{n. p.}

 

Potential

mode present tense singular

 

I may or can be loved

amer, ameris or amere, ametur. Plural amemur, amemini, amentur

docear

 

 

taught

legar

aris or are, atur. Plural amur, amini, antur

audiar

 

heard

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

amarer

 

I would should or ought to be loved

docerer

 

taught

 

reris or rere, retur. Plural emur, emini, entur

legerer

 

read

audirer

 

heard

 

Preterperfect tense singular

amatus

 

I would, should or ought to have been loved

doctus

sim or fuerim, tus sis or fueris, tus sit or

lectus

fuerit. Plural ti simus or fuerimus, ti sitis

auditus

or fueritis, ti sint or fuerint

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

amatus

 

I would, should or ought to had been loved

doctus

essem or fuissem, tus esses or fuisses, tus esset

lectus auditus

or fuisset. Plural ti essemus or fuissemus, ti essetis or fuissetis, ti essent or fuissent

 

Future tense

singular

amatus

 

I may or can be loved hereafter

doctus

ero or fuero, tus eris or fueris, tus erit or

lectus

fuerit. Plural ti erimus or fuerimus, ti eritis

auditus

or fueritis, ti erunt or fuerint

 

Conjunctive mode present singular

 

 

cum

 

when I am loved

amer, ameris or amere, ametur. Plural amemur, amemini, amentur

docear

 

 

taught

legar

aris, or are, atur. Plural amur, amini, antur

read

audiar

 

heard

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

 

 

cum

 

 

amarer

 

when I was loved

docerer

 

taught

 

reris or rere, etur. Plural emur, emini, rentur

legerer

 

read

audirer

 

heard

{n. p.}

 

 

Preterperfect tense singular

 

cum

amatus

 

when I have been loved

doctus

sim or fuerim, tus sis or fueris, tus sit or

lectus

fuerit. Plural ti simus or fuerimus, ti sitis

auditus

or fueritis, ti sint or fuerint

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

 

cum

amatus

 

when I had been loved

doctus

essem or fuissem, tus esses or fuisses, tus esset

lectus

or fuisset. Plural ti essemus or fuissemus, ti

auditus

essetis or fuissetis, ti essent or fuissent

 

Future tense singular

 

cum

amatus

 

when I shall or will be loved

doctus

ero or fuero, tus eris or fueris, tus eris or

lectus

fuerit. Plural ti erimus or fuerimus, ti eritis

auditus

or fueritis, ti erunt or fuerint

 

Infinitive mode present and preterimperfect tense

 

amari

to be loved

doceri

to be taught

legi

to be read

audiri

to be heard

 

Preterperfect and preterpluperfect tense

 

amatum

 

to have or had been loved

doctum

to have or had been taught

 

esse or fuisse

lectum

to have or had been read

 

 

auditum

 

to have or had been heard

 

Future tense

 

amatum iri or amandum esse

to be loved hereafter

doctum iri or docendum esse

taught hereafter

lectum iri or legendum esse

read hereafter

auditum iri or audiendum esse

heard hereafter

 

Participle preterite

 

amatus

loved

 

amandus

to be loved hereafter

doctus

taught

docendus

taught

 

participle future

 

 

lectus

read

legendus

read

auditus

heard

audiendus

heard

{n. p.}

 

possum, potes, potui, posse, potens, to may or can

volo, vis, volui, velle, volendi, volendo, volendum, supine missing, volens, to will

nolo, non vis, nolui, nolle, nolendi, nolendo, nolendum, supine missing, nolens, to nill

malo, mavis, malui, malle, malendi, malendo, malendum, supine missing, malens, to have liefer

edo, edes or edis, edi, edere or esse, edendi, edendo, edendum, esum, esu, edens, esurus, to eat

fio, fis, factus sum, fieri, factus, fiendus, to be made

fero, fers, tuli, ferre, ferendi, ferendo, ferendum, latum, latu, ferens laturus, to bear or to suffer

feror, ferris, latus sum or fui, ferri, latus, ferendus, to be born or suffered

 

Indicative mode present tense singular

 

possum, potes, potest

 

 

 

possumus, potestis, possunt

volo, vis, vult

 

volumus, vultis, volunt

nolo, non vis, non vult

 

nolumus, non vultis, nolunt

malo, mavis, mavult

 

malumus, mavultis, malunt

edo, edis or es edit

Plural

edimus, editis or estis, edunt

fio, fis, fit or est

 

fimus, fitis, fiunt

fero, fers, fert

 

ferimus, fertis, ferunt

feror, ferris

fert

 

ferimus, ferimini, feruntur

 

 

or ferre

 

 

 

 

 

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

 

poteram

 

 

volebam

 

nolebam

 

malebam

as, at. Plural amus, atis, ant

edebam

 

fiebam

 

ferebam

 

 

 

ferebar

 

ferebaris or

 

ferebatur. Plurali ferebamur, ferebamini, ferebatur

 

 

 

ferebare

{E}

 

Preterperfect tense singular

 

potui

 

 

 

isti, it. Plural imus, istis, erunt or ere

volui

nolui

malui

edi

tuli

 

 

 

 

 

sum or fui, tus es or fuisti, tus est or fuit

factus

Plural ti sumus or fuimus, ti estis or

latus

fuistis, ti sunt fuerunt or fuere

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

 

potueram

 

 

 

ras, rat. Plural ramus, ratis rant

volueram

nolueram

malueram

ederam

tuleram

 

 

 

 

eram or fueram, tus eras or fueras, tus erat

factus

or fuerat. Plural ti eramus or fueramus, ti

latus

eratis or fueratis, ti erant or fuerant

 

Future tense singular

 

potero, poteris, poterit. Plural poterimus, poteritis, poterunt

volam

 

 

 

es, et. Plural emus, etis, ent

nolam

malam

edam

fiam

feram

 

ferar

 

fereris or

 

feretur. Plural feremur, feremini, ferentur

ferere

 

Imperative mode

possum

 

 

volo

have none imperative mode

malo

 

{n. p.}

 

 

 

 

 

Singulariter

 

noli

 

 

 

 

 

 

nolite nolitote

 

nolito

edat

 

 

 

edite este

 

edant

es, esto

esto

edamus

estote

edunto

ede, edito

edito

 

editote

 

fitotu, fiat

 

Plural

fiamus

fite

 

fiant

 

fito

 

 

 

fitote

fiunto

fer

 

ferat

 

 

feramus

ferte

 

ferant

 

ferto

ferto

 

 

fertote

ferunto

 

ferre

feratur

 

 

feramur

ferimini

ferantor

fertor

fertor

 

 

feriminor

feruntor

 

Optative mode the present tense singular

 

 

utinam

 

possim

 

 

is, it. Plural imus, itis, int

volim

nolim

malim

edam

 

 

fiam

as, at. Plural amus, atis, ant

feram

 

 

ferar, feraris or ferare, feratur. Plural feramur, feramini, ferantur

 

Preterimperfect tense singular

 

utinam

 

possem

 

 

 

 

 

es, et. Plural emus, etis, ent

vellem

nollem

mallem

ederem

or essem

fierem

 

ferrem

 

ferrer, ferreris, or ferrere, ferretur. Plural ferremur, ferremini, ferrentur

 

Preterperfect tense singular

 

potuerim

 

 

 

ris, rit. Plural rimus, ritis, rint

voluerim

noluerim

maluerim

ederim

tulerim

{E. ii.}

 

 

 

 

 

sim or fuerim, tus sis or fueris, tus sit or

 

factus

fuerit. Plural ti simus or fuerimus, ti sitis

 

latus

or fueritis, ti sint or fuerint

 

Preterpluperfect tense singular

 

utinam

 

potuissem

 

 

 

ses, set. Plural semus, setis, sent

voluissem

noluissem

maluissem

edissem

tulissem

 

 

 

 

 

essem or fuissem, tus esses or fuisses, tus

esset or fuisset. Plural ti essemus or fuissemus,

ti essetis or fuissetis, ti essent or fuissent

 

factus

 

 

latus

 

Future tense singular

 

utinam

 

potuero

 

 

 

ris, rit. Plural rimus, ritis, rint

voluero

noluero

maluero

edero

tulero

 

 

 

 

 

ero or fuero, tus eris or fueris, tus erit

or fuerit. Plural ti erimus or fuerimus, ti

eritis or fueritis, ti erunt or fuerint

 

factus

 

 

latus

 

The potential and the subjunctive mode be formed and conjugated or varied like the optative.

 

Infinitive mode present and preterimperfect tense

 

posse

preterperfect and preterpluperfect

 

potuisse

 

 

 

future

 

 

velle

voluisse

 

nolle

noluisse

 

malle

maluisse

 

edere or esse

edisse

esurum

ferre

 

tulisse

laturum esse

{n. p.}

 

 

fieri

 

preterperfect and

 

factum esse or fuisse

present and preterimperfect tense

ferri

preterpluperfect

latum esse or fuisse

 

 

factum iri or faciendum esse

future tense

latum iri or ferendum esse

 

Eo and queo make ibam and quibam in the preterimperfect tense of the indicative mode: and ibo and quibo in the future tense, and in all other modes and tenses are varied like verbs in o of the fourth conjugation, saving that they make the gerunds eundi, eundo, eundum, queundi, queundo, queundum.

Of the preterperfect tense of the indicative mode be formed the preterpluperfect tense of the same mode. The preterperfect tense, the preterpluperfect tense, and the future tense of the optative mode, the potential mode, and the subjunctive mode. The preterperfect and pluperfect tense of the infinitive mode, as of amavi, are formed amaveram, amaverim, amavissem, amavero, amavisse, amaveram, amaverim, and amavero, by changing i into e, sem, and se, keeping i still.

Impersonals be declined in the voice of the third person throughout all modes and tenses, as delectat, delectabat, decet, decebat, and have commonly before their English this sign “it”, as it “delighteth me to read”, delectat me legere.

 

 

 

 

 

forming of tenses

{E. iii.}

 

Of a Participle

A participle is a part of speech derived of a verb and taketh part of a noun as gender and case, part of a verb as tense and signification, and part of both as number and figure.

A participle hath four tenses: the present, the preter, the future in rus, and the future in dus.

A participle of the present tense hath his English ending in ing, as “loving”, and his Latin in ans, or ens, as amans, docens, and it is formed of the preterimperfect tense by changing bam into ens, as amabam, amans, audiebam, audiens.

A participle of the future in rus, betokeneth to do like the infinitive mode of the active voice, as amaturus, “to love or about to love”. And is formed of the later supine, by putting to rus, as doctu, docturus.

A participle of the preter tense hath his English ending in “d”, “t”, or “n”, as “loved”, “taught”, “slain”, and his Latin endeth in tus, sus, xus, as amatus, visus, nexus, and one in uus, as mortuus. And is formed of the later supine by putting to s, as lectu lectus.

A participle of the future in dus, betokeneth to suffer like the infinitive mode of the passive voice, as amandus, “to be loved”. And it is formed of the genitive case of the participle of the present tense by changing tis into dus, as legentis, legendus. And it is also found to have the signification of the present tense, as legendis veteribus proficis, “in reading old authors thou dost profit”. {n. p.}

Of a verb active and of a verb neuter, which hath the supines, come two participles, one of the present tense, and another of the future in rus, as of amo cometh amans, amaturus, of curro, currens, cursurus.

Of a verb passive, whose active hath the supines, come two participles, one of the preter tense, and another of the future in dus, as of amor, cometh amatus, amandus.

Of a verb deponent cometh three participles, one of the present tense, one of the preter tense, and another of the future in rus, as of auxilior, auxilians, auxiliatus, auxiliaturus. And if the verb deponent governeth an accusative case after him, it may form also a participle in dus, as of loquor, loquendus.

Of a verb common cometh four participles, as of largior cometh largiens, largiturus, largitus, largiendus.

Participles of the present tense be declined like nouns adjectives with three articles, as hic, haec and hoc amans.

Participles of other tenses be declined like nouns adjectives of three divers endings, as amaturus, amas, amandus, amanda, amandum.

 

Of an Adverb

An adverb is a part of speech, joined to the verbs to declare his signification.

Adverbs some be of time, as hodie, cras, olim, aliquando.

Some of place, as ubi, ibi, hic, istic, illic, foras, foris. {n. p.}

Some of number, as semel, bis, ter, quater.

Some of order, as inde, deinde, denique, postremo.

Some of asking or doubting, as cur, quare, unde, quorsum, num, numquid.

Some of calling, as heus, o, ehodum.

Some of affirming, as certe, nae, profecto, sane, scilicet, licet, esto.

Some of denying, as non, haud, minime, nequaquam.

Some of swearing, as pol, aedepol, hercle, medius fidius.

Some of exhorting, as eia, age, agedum.

Some of flattering, as sodes, amabo.

Some of forbidding, as ne.

Some of wishing, as utinam, si, o si, o.

Some of gathering together, as simul, una, pariter, non modo, non solum.

Some of parting, as seorsum, sigillatim, vicatim.

Some of choosing, as potius, imo.

Some of a thing non finished, as pene, fere, vix, modo non.

Some of showing, as en, ecce.

Some of doubting, as forsan, forsitan, fortassis, fortasse.

Some of chance, as forte, fortuito.

Some of likeness, as sic, sicut, quasi, ceu, tamquam, velut.

Some of quality, as bene, male, docte, fortiter.

Some of quantity, as multum, parum, minimum, paululum.

Some of comparison, as tam, quam, magis, minus, maxime.

Certain adverbs be compared, as docte, doctius, doctissime: fortiter, fortius, fortissime, prope, propius, proxime.

{n. p.}

 

Of a Conjunction

A conjunction is a part of speech that joineth words and sentences together.

Of conjunctions some be copulatives, as et, que, quoque, atque, nec, neque.

Some disjunctives, as aut, ve, vel, seu, sive.

Some discretives, as sed, quidem, autem, vero, at, ast.

Some causals, as nam, namque, enim, etenim, quia, ut, quod, quando, quum.

Some conditionals, as si, sin, modo, dum, dummodo.

Some exceptives, as ni, nisi, quin, alioquin, praeterquam.

Some interrogatives, as ne, an, verum, necne, anne, nonne.

Some illatives, as ergo, ideo, igitur, quare, itaque, proin.

Some adversatives, as etsi, quamquam, quamvis, licet.

Some redditives to the same, as tamen, attamen.

Some electievs, as quam, ac, atque.

Some diminutives, as saltem, vel.

 

Of a Preposition

A preposition is a part of speech most commonly set before other parts in apposition, as ad patrem, or in composition, as indoctus.

These prepositions following serve to the accusative case: {F. i.}

 

ad

to

extra

without

post

after

apud

at

intra

within

trans

on the further side

ante

before

inter

between

ultra

beyond

adversus

 

against

infra

beneath

praeter

beside

adversum

iuxta

beside or nigh to

supra

above

cis

 

on this side

ob

for

circiter

about

citra

pone

behind

usque

until

circum

 

about

per

by or through

secus

by

circa

prope

nigh

versus

towards

contra

against

propter

for

penes

in the power

erga

towards

secundum

after

 

 

Where note that versus is set after his casual word, as Londinum versus, “towards London”. And likewise may penes be set also.

 

These prepositions following serve to the ablative case:

 

 

a

 

 

 

pro

or

ab

from or

prae

before or in comparison

abs

fro

palam

openly

cum

with

sine

 

without

coram

before or in presence

absque

 

clam

privily

tenus

until or unto

de

 

 

 

e

of or fro

 

 

ex

 

 

 

 

Where note that, if the casual word joined with tenus be the plural number, it shall be put in the genitive case and be set before tenus, as aurium tenus, “up to the ears”. {n. p.}

These prepositions following serve to both cases, as in, with this signe to, to the ablative case, as in urbem, “into the city”.

In without this sign “to”, to the ablative, as in te spes est, “my hope is in thee”.

Sub noctem, “a little before night”.

Sub iudice lis est, “the matter is before the judge”.

Super lapidem, “upon a stone”.

Super viridi fronde, “upon green leaves”.

Subter terram, “under the earth”.

Subter aqua, “under the water”.

 

Of an Interjection

An interjection is a part of speech which betokeneth a passion of the mind, under an unperfect voice.

Some are of mirth, as euax, vah.

Some of sorrow, as heu, hei.

Some of dread, as atat.

Some of marvelling, as pape.

Some of disdaining, as hem, vah.

Some of shunning, as apage.

Some of praising, as euge.

Some of scorning, as hui.

Some of exclamation, as proh deum atque hominum fidem. O.

Some of cursing, as vae, malum.

Some of laughing, as hah, ha, he.

Some of calling, as eho, oh, io.

Some of silence, as au. And such other. {F. ii.}

 

Godly Lessons for Children

It is the first point of wisdom, to know thyself.

Primus est sapientiae gradus te ipsum noscere.

Fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.

Initium sapientiae timor domini.

There is no man that sinneth not.

Non est homo qui non peccet.

If we say we be faultless we deceive ourselves, and truth is not in us.

Si dixerimus peccatum non habemus, nos ipsos fallimus, et veritas in nobis non est.

So God loved the world that he gave his only begotten son, that none which believeth in him should perish, but enjoy everlasting life.

Sic deus dilexit mundum, ut filium suum unigenitum daret, ut omnis qui credit in eum, non pereat, sed habeat vitam aeternam.

Christ is the lamb of God, which taketh away the sins of the world.

Christus est agnus dei, qui tollit peccata mundi.

There is none other name under heaven, given unto men, by the which we must be saved.

Non est aliud nomen sub caelo datum hominibus, in quo oporteat non salvos fieri.

He that hath my commandments, and keepeth them, it is he that loveth me. {n. p.}

Qui habet praecepta mea, et servat ea, ille est qui diligit me.

Ye be my friends, if ye do whatsoever I command you.

Vos amici mei estis, si feceritis quaecumque ego praecipio vobis.

I give you a new commandment, to love each other as I have loved you.

Praeceptum novum do vobis, ut diligatis mutuo sicut dilexi vos.

Not the hearers of the law be just before God, but they that express the law in their works shall be counted just.

Non qui audiunt legem iusti sunt apud deum, sed qui legem factis exprimunt iusti habebuntur.

Honour thy father and mother, that thou mayest do well, and live long upon the earth.

Honora patrem et matrem, ut bene tibi sit, et sis longaevus in terra.

Be subject to the King, as to the most excellent, and to his deputies, which be sent of him.

Regi subditi estote tamquam praecellenti, et praesidibus ut qui ab eo mittantur.

Do reverence to age.

Coram cano capite assurge.

Thou shalt not hurt no widow, ne none that is fatherless.

Viduae et pupillo non nocebis.

Thou shalt upbraid no stranger.

Advenae non exprobrabis.

Nothing is given more truly to Christ than that that is given to the poor.

Nihil verius datur Christo, quam quod egenis confertur. {F. iii.}

See not when thou givest, have an eye when thou takest.

Da caecus, accipe oculatus.

A good conscience is a sure defence.

Murus aeneus sana conscientia.

Be in deed as thou dost pretend.

Quod videri vis esto.

It is true honour to be worshipped for virtue.

Verus honor est venerari ob virtutem.

It is true glory to be well reported for virtue.

Vera gloria est bene audire ob virtutem.

It is true nobility to be like in conditions to the good parents.

Vera nobilitas est bonis parentibus esse moribus similis.

It is true power to have many whom thou mayest do for.

Vera potentia est habere multos quibus probe consulas.

There is no stronger defence than faithful friends.

Nullum potentius satellitium quam amici fideles.

Friendship is the sauce of life.

Sal vitae amicitia.

There is no true friendship but among good men.

Vera amicitia non est nisi inter bonos.

Pleasure is the bait of mischiefs.

Voluptas malorum esca.

Memory is made weak with delicates.

Memoria deliciis enervatur.

Divers meats be noisome to man, but divers sauces more noisome.

Varietas ciborum homini pestilens, pestilentior condimentorum.

Wine is poison to the sinews and the destruction of memory. {n. p.}

Vinum nervorum venenum et memoriae mors est.

Gay garments provoke to pride.

Culta vestimenta sunt instrumenta superbiae.

Be not ashamed to learn things that thou knowest not.

Quae ignoras ne pudeat quaerere.

Learn of fools to be more aware.

Ex stultis disce quo fias cautior.

Learn of wise men that thou mayest be the better.

Ex sapientibus disce quo fias melior.

Time ought to be much set by.

Magno aestimandum tempus.

Truth is the daughter of time.

Veritas temporis filia.

A true man is believed, yea though he lieth.

Veraci creditur et mentienti.

A liar is not believed though he sweareth.

Mendaci non creditur ne iurato quidem.

Let no day scape without profit.

Nullus praetereat sine linea dies.

 

The Concords of Latin Speech

For the due joining of words in construction it is to be understand that in Latin speech there be three concords: the first between the nominative case and the verb, the second between the substantive and the adjective, the third between the antecedent and the relative.

When an English is given to be made in Latin, {n. p.} look out the principal verb. If there be more verbs than one in a sentence, the first is the principal verb, except it be the infinitive mode, or have before it a relative, as “that”, “whom”, “which”, or a conjunction as ut (that), cum (when), si if, or such other.

When ye have found the verb, ask this question “who or what?”, and that word that answereth to the question shall be the nominative case to the verb. Which nominative case shall in making and construing Latin be set before the verb, except in asking a question, and then the nominative is set after the verb or after the sign of the verb, as amas tu? “Lovest thou?”; Venit ne rex? “Doth the King come?”

 

The First Concord

A verb personal agreeth with his nominative case in number and person, as “the master readeth and ye regard not”, praeceptor legit, vos vero negligitis.

Where note that the first person is more worthy than the second, and the second more worthy than the third.

Many nominative cases singular with a conjunction copulative coming between them will have a verb plural, which verb plural shall agree in person with the nominative case of the most worthy person, as “I and thou be in safeguard”, ego et tu sumus in tuto; “thou and thy father are in jeopardy”, tu et pater periclitamini; “thy father and thy master have sent for thee”, pater et praeceptor accersunt te.

When a verb cometh between two nominative cases of divers numbers, the verb may indifferently accord with either of them, so that they be both of one person, as amantium irae amoris redintegratio est, {n. p.} “the falling out of lovers is a renewing of love”; quid enim nisi vota supersunt? “For what remaineth saving only prayers?”

 

The Second Concord

When ye have an adjective, ask this question “who or what?”, and that that answereth to the question shall be the substantive.

The noun adjective agreeth with his substantive in case, gender, and number, as “a sure friend is tried in a doubtful matter”, amicus certus in re incerta cernitur.

Likewise, participles and pronouns be joined with substantives, as “a man armed”, homo armatus; “a field to be tilled”, ager colendus; “this man”, hic vir; “it is my master”, meus herus est.

Here note that the masculine gender is more worthy then the feminine, and the feminine more worthy than the neuter.

Many substantives singular, with a conjunction copulative coming between them, will have an adjective plural, which adjective shall agree with the substantive of most worthy gender, as “the King and the Queen blessed”, rex et regina beati.

 

The Third Concord

When ye have a relative ask this question, “who or what?”, and that that answereth to the question shall be the antecedent, which is a word that goeth before the relative, and is rehearsed again of the relative.

The relative agreeth with his antecedent in gender, number, and person, as “that man is wise that speaketh few”, vir sapit qui pauca loquitur. {G}

When this English “that” may be turned into this English which, it is a relative, otherwise it is a conjunction, which in Latin is called quod or ut, and it may elegantly be put away by turning the nominative case into the accusative, and the verb into the infinitive mode, as “I am glad that thou art in good health”, gaudeo quod tu bene vales, gaudeo te bene valere; “I bid thee to go hence”, iubeo ut abeas, iubeo te abire.

Many antecedents singular, having a conjunction copulative between them, will have a relative plural, which relative shall agree with the antecedent of the most worthy gender, as “the rule and dignity which thou hast required”, imperium et dignitas quae petiisti. For in things not apt to have life the neuter gender is most worthy, yea and in such case though the substantives or antecedents be of the masculine or of the feminine gender, and none of them of the neuter, yet may the adjective or relative be put in the neuter gender, as “the bow and arrows be good”, arcus et calami sunt bona; “the bow and arrows which thou hast broken”, arcus et calami quae fregisti.

 

The Case of the Relative

When there cometh no nominative case between the relative and the verb, the relative shall be the nominative case to the verb, as “wretched is that person which is in love with money”, miser est qui nummos admiratur.

But when there cometh a nominative case between the relative and the verb, the relative shall be such case as the verb will have after him, as “happy is he whom other men harms do make to beware”, felix quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum. {n. p.}

When a relative cometh between two substantives of diverse genders, it may indifferentely accord with either of them, as “the bird which is called a sparrow”, avis quae passer appellatur, or avis qui passer appellatur.

Nouns interrogatives and infinites follow the rule of the relative, as quis, uter, qualis, quantus, quotus, etc., which ever come before the verb, like the relative, as hei mihi qualis erat, talis erat, qualem numquam vidi.

 

Construction of Nouns Substantives

When two substantives come together betokening diverse things, the later shall be the genitive case, as “the eloquence of Cicero”, facundia Ciceronis; “the book of Vergil”, codex Vergilii; “a lover of studies”, amator studiorum; “the opinion of Plato”, dogma Platonis.

But if they belong both to one thing, they shall be put both in one case, as “my father being a man, loveth me a child”, pater meus vir, amat me puerum.

When the English of this word res is put with an adjective, ye may put away res and put the adjective in the neuter gender like a substantive, as “many things have let me”, multa me impedierunt.

An adjective in the neuter gender, put alone without a substantive, standeth for a substantive and may have a genitive case after him as if it were a substantive, as “much gains”, multum lucri; “how much business”, quantum negotii; “That work”, id operis.

The praise or dispraise of a thing is used diversely, but most commonly in the ablative or in the genitive case, as “a child of a good towardness”, puer bona indole, puer bonae indolis. {G. ii.}

Opus et usus, Latin for need, require an ablative case, as “I have need of thy judgement”, opus est mihi tuo iudicio: “my son hath need of twenty pounds”, viginti minis usus est filio.

 

Construction of Sdjectives

The Genitive Case

Adjectives that signify desire, knowledge, remembrance, or contrary wise, and such like, require a genitive case, as “covetous of money”, cupidus auri; “expert of warfare”, peritus belli; “Ignorant of all things”, ignarus omnium; “bold of heart”, fidens animi; “doubtful of mind”, dubius mentis; “mindful of that is past”, memor praeteriti; “accused of theft”, reus furti.

Nouns partitives and certain interrogatives, with certain nouns of number, require a genitive case, as aliquis, uter, neuter, nemo, nullus, solus, unus, medius, quisque, quisquis, quicumque, quidam, quis, for aliquis, or quis, an interrogative, unus, duo, tres, etc., primus, secundus, tertius etc., as aliquis nostrum. Primus omnium.

When a question is asked, I shall answer by the same case and tense that the question was asked by, as cuius est fundus? Vicini. Quid agitur in ludo literario? Studetur. Except the question be asked by cuius, cuia, cuium, as cuia est sententia? Ciceronis. Or by a word that may govern diverse cases, as quanti emisti librum? Parvo. Or except I must answer by one of these possessives, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, as cuius est domus? Non vestra, sed nostra.

Nouns of the comparative and the superlative degree, put partitively, that is to say with this English {n. p.} “of” or “among” after them, require a genitive case, as “of the ears the left is the softer”, aurium mollior est sinistra; “Cicero the most eloquent of orators”, Cicero oratorum eloquentissimus.

Nouns of the comparative degree, having “than” or “by” after them, will have an ablative case, as frigideor glacie, “more cold than ice”; doctior multo, “better learned by a great deal”; uno pede altior, higher by a foot.

 

The Dative Case

Adjectives that betoken profit or disprofit, likeness, unlikeness, pleasure, submitting, or belonging to any thing, require a dative case, as “labour is profitable to the body”, labor est utilis corpori; “equal to Hector”, aequalis Hectori; “fit for war”, idoneus bello; “pleasant to all persons”, iucundus omnibus; “suppliant to his father”, parenti supplex; “proper to me”, mihi proprium. Likewise nouns of the passive signification in bilis, and participials in dus, as flebilis flendus omnibus, “to be lamented of all men”; formidabilis formidandus hosti, “to be feared of his enemy”.

 

The Accusative Case

The measure of length, breadth, or thickness of anything is put after adjectives in the accusative case, and sometime in the ablative case, as turris alta centum pedes, “a tower an hundred foot high”; arbor lata tres digitos, “a tree three fingers broad”; liber crassus tres pollices, or tribus pollicibus, “a book thrice inches thick”.

 

The Ablative Case

Adjectives signifying fullness, emptiness, plenty, {n. p.} or wanting, require an ablative case, and sometimes a genitive, as copiis abundans. Crura thymo plena. Vacuus ira, irae, ab ira. Nulla epistola inanis re aliqua. Ditissimus agri. Stultorum plena sunt omnia. Quis nisi mentis inops oblatum respuat aurum? Integer vitae scelerisque purus. Non eget Mauri iaculis nec arcu. Expers omnium, corpus inane animae.

These adjectives dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, with such other, will have an ablative case, as dignus honore; captus oculis; virtute praeditus; paucis contentus.

 

Construction of the Pronoun

These genitive cases of primitives, mei, tui, sui, nostri, and vestri, be used when suffering is signified, as pars tui, amor mei, but when doing is signified, meus, tuus, suus, noster, and vester be used, as ars tua, imago tua.

These genitive cases, nostrum, vestrum, be used after distributives, partitives, comparatives, and superlatives, as nemo vestrum, aliquis nostrum, maior vestrum, maximus natu nostrum.

 

Construction of the Verb, and First with the Nominative Case

Sum, forem, fio, existo, and certain verbs passives, as vocor, salutor, and verbs of behaviour or gesture, as bibo, cubo, dormio, will have such case after them as they have before them, as fama est malum; malus cultura fit bonus; craesus vocatur dives; Horatius salutatur poeta; virtus clara aeternaque habetur; dormit securus bibit ieiunus; Petrus studet videri dives; malo me divitem esse quam haberi. {n. p.}

 

The Genitive Case

This verb sum, betokening possession or pertaining to anything, will have a genitive case, as haec vestis est patris; insipientis est dicere, non putaram.

Except these nominative cases, meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, vestrum, as meum est iniuriam non adferre, tuum est iuxta omnia pati.

Verbs that betoken to esteem or regard require a genitive case, as parvi ducitur probitas, maximi penditur nobilitas.

Verbs of accusing, condemning or warning and verbs of contrary signification will have a genitive case, or an ablative of the cause, most commonly without a preposition but sometime with a preposition, as hic furti se alligat vel furto, admonuit me errati vel errato; de pecuniis repetundis damnatus est.

Satago, misereor, miseresco require a genitive case, as rerum suarum satagit; miserere mei deus.

Reminiscor, obliviscor, memini, will have a genitive or an accusative case, as reminiscor historiae, obliviscor carminis, recordor pueritiam, obliviscor lectionem; memini tui vel de te, “I speak of thee”; memini te, “I remember thee”.

Egeo, indigeo tui or te, “I have need of thee”; potior urbis, “I conquer the city”; potior voto, “I obtain my desire”.

 

The Dative Case

All manner of verbs put acquisitively, that is to say, with these tokens “to” or “for” after them, will have a dative case, as non omnibus dormio, “I sleep not to al men”; huic habeo non tibi, “I have it for this man, and not for thee”. {n. p.}

To this rule doth belong also verbs betokening

 

to profit or disprofit, as

to compare, as

 

commodo

 

comparo

incommodo

compono

noceo

confero

 

to give or restore, as

to promise or to pay, as

to command or to show, as

 

dono

 

promitto

 

impero

 

reddo

polliceor

indico

refero

solvo

monstro

 

to trust, as

to obey or to be against, as

to threaten or to be angry

 

fido

 

 

obedio

 

 

minor

 

confido

adulor

indignor

fidem habeo

repugno

irascor

 

Sum, with his compounds except possum, also verbs compounded with satis, bene, and male, as satisfacio, benefacio, malefacio, finally certain verbs compounded with these prepositions, prae, ad, con, sub, an, post, ob, in, and inter, will have a dative case, as praeluceo, adiaceo, commigro, suboleo, antesto, posthabeo, obiicio, insulto, intersero.

Est, put for habeo, will have a dative case, as est tibi mater. Also sum and many other verbs will have a double dative case, as sum tibi praesidio; do tibi vestem pignori; verto hoc tibi vitio; hoc tu tibi laudi ducis.

 

The ccusative case

Verbs transitives are all such as have after them an accusative case of the sufferer, whether they be actives, common, or deponents, as usus promptos facit; feminae ludificantur viros; largitur pecuniam.

Also verbs neuters may have an accusative case of their own signification, as Endimionis somnum dormis; gaudeo gaudium; vivo vitam.

Verbs of asking, teaching, and arraying, will {n. p.} have two accusative cases, one of the sufferer, and the other of the thing, as rogo te pecuniam, doceo te literas, quod te iamdudum hortor, exuo me gladium.

 

The Ablative Case

All verbs require an ablative case of the instrument or of the cause, or of the manner of doing, as ferit cum gladio, taceo metu, summa eloquentia causam egit.

The word of price is put after verbs in the ablative case, as vendidi auro, emptus sum argento. Except these genitives when they be put alone without substantives, tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, tantivis, tantidem, quantivis, quantilibet, quanticumque, as quanti mercatus es hunc equum? Certe pluris quam vellem.

Verbs of plenty or scarceness, filling or emptying, loading or unloading, will have an ablative case, as affluis opibus, cares virtute, expleo te fabulis, spoliavit me bonis omnibus, oneras stomachum cibo, levabo te hoc onere. Likewise fungor, fruor, laetor, gaudeo, dignor, muto, munero, communico, afficio, prosequor.

Verbs that betoken receiving, distance or taking away will have an ablative case with a, ab, e, ex, or de, as accepi literas a Petro; audivi a nuntio; longe distat a nobis; eripui te a malis. And this ablative may be turned into the dative, as subtraxit mihi cingulum.

Verbs of comparison or exceeding may have an ablative case of the word that signifieth the measure of exceeding, as praefero hunc multo; paulo illum superat.

A noun or a pronoun substantive joined with a participle, expressed or understand, and having none other word whereof it may be governed, shall be put in the ablative case absolute, as “the King coming, the enemies fled”, rege veniente hostes fugerunt; “I being {H} captain, thou shalt overcome”, me duce vinces. And it may be resolved by any of these words, dum, cum, quando, si, quamquam, or postquam, as rege veniente that is dum veniret rex; me duce id est si ego dux fuero.

 

Construction of Passives

A verb passive will have after him an ablative case with a preposition or sometimes a dative of the doer, as Vergilius legitur a me; tibi fama petatur. And the same ablative or dative shall be the nominative case to the verb if it be made by the active, as ego lego Vergilium; petas tu famam.

 

Gerunds

Gerunds and supines will have such case as the verbs that they come of, as otium scribendi literas; ad consulendum tibi; auditum poetas.

 

Di

The gerund in di is put after certain substantives, as studium, causa, tempus; otium, occasio, libido; spes, oportunitas, voluptas; modus, gestus, satietas; potestas, licentia, consuetudo; consilium, vis, norma; amor, cupido, locus, and others like.

It cometh also after certain adjectives, as cupidus visendi, certus eundi; peritus medicandi, gnarus bellandi.

 

Do

When I have the English of the participle of the present tense with this sign “of”, or “with”, coming after a noun adjective, it shall in Latin making be put in the gerund in do, as defessus sum ambulando.

Also the English of the participle of the present tense, coming without a substantive, with this sign “in” or “by” before him, shall in Latin making be put in {n. p.} the gerund in do, as Caeser dando, sublevando, ignoscendo, gloriam adeptus est. In apparando, totum hunc consumunt diem.

And the gerund in do is used either without a preposition or with one of these prepositions a, ab, de, e, ex, cum, in, as deterrent a bibendo, ab amando, cogitat de edendo, ratio bene scribendi cum loquendo coniuncta est.

 

Dum

The English of the infinitive mode coming after a reason and showing a cause of the reason may be put in the gerund in dum, as dies mihi ut satis sit ad agendum, vereor.

The gerund in dum is used after one of these prepositions, ad, ob, propter, inter, ante, as ad capiendum hostes; ob, vel propter redimendum captivos: inter cenandum; ante damnandum.

And when ye have this English “must” or “ought”, in a reason where it seemeth to be made by this verb oportet, it may be put in the gerund in dum, with this verb est. And then the word that in the English seemeth to be the nominative case shall be put in the dative case, as “I must go hence”, abeundum est mihi.

 

Supines

The first supine hath the active signification and is put after verbs and participles that betoken moving to a place, as eo cubitum; spectatum admissi risum teneatis amici?

The later supine hath the passive signification, and is put after nouns adjectives and such like, as dignus, indignus, turpis, foedus; proclivis, facilis; odiosus, mirabilis, optimus. And this supine may also be turned into the infinitive mode passive, as it may be {H. ii.} indifferently said in Latin facile factu, or facile fieri, “easy to be done”; turpe dictu, or turpe dici, “unhonest to be spoken”.

 

The Time

Nouns that betoken part of time be commonly used in the ablative case, as nocte vigilas, luce dormis, but nouns that betoken continual term of time be used commonly in the accusative case, as sexaginta annos natus; hiemem totam stertis.

 

Space of Place

Nouns that betoken space between place and place, be commonly put in the accusative case, as pedem hinc ne discesseris, “go thou not a foot from this same place”.

 

A Place

Nouns appellatives or names of great places be put with a preposition if they follow a verb that signifieth “in a place”, “to a place”, “from a place”, or “by a place”, as vivo in Anglia; veni per Galliam in Italiam; proficiscor ex urbe.

“In a place”, or “at a place”, if the place be a proper name of the first declension or second and the singular number, shall be put in the genitive case, as vixit Londini, studuit Oxoniae. And these nouns humi, domi, militiae, belli, be likewise used, as procumbit humi bos; militiae enutritus est; domi bellique otiosi vivitis.

But if the place be the third declension or the plural number it shall be put in the dative or in the ablative case, as militavit Carthagini or Carthagine. Athenis natus est. Likewise we say, ruri or rure educatus est.

“To a place”, if the place be a proper name, it shall be put in the accusative case without a preposition, as eo Romam. Likewise, confero me domum; recipio me rus. {n. p.}

“From a place”, or “by a place”, if the place be a proper name, it shall be put in the ablative case without a preposition, as discessit Londino; profectus est Londino, or per Londinum, Cantabrigiam. Domus and rus be used likewise, as abiit domo, rure reversus est.

 

Impersonals

A verb impersonal hath no nominative case before him and this word “it”, commonly is his sign.

Interest, refert, and est for interest, require a genitive case of all casual words except mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, and cuia, as interest omnium recte agere; tua refert teipsum nosse.

Certain impersonals require a dative case, as libet, licet, patet, liquet, constat, placet, expedit, prodest, sufficit, vacat, accidit, convenit, contigit, and other like.

Some will have an accusative case only, as delectat, decet, iuvat, oportet, some beside the accusative will have also a genitive, as poenitet, taedet, miseret, miserescit, pudet, piget, as nostri nosmet poeniter; me civitatis taedet; pudet me negligentiae; miseret me tui.

A verb impersonal of the passive voice hath like case as other verbs passives have, as bene fit multis a principe, yet many times the case is not expressed but understand, as maxima vi certatur.

When a deed is signified to be done of many, the verb being a verb neuter, we may well change the verb neuter in to the impersonal in tur, as inignem posita est, fletur, etc.

 

A Participle

Participles govern such case as the verb that they come of, as fruiturus amicis, consulens tibi, diligendus ab omnibus.

Here note that participles may four manner ways {H. iii.} be changed into nouns: the first is when the voice of a participle is construed with another case then the verb that it cometh of, as appetens vini, “greedy of wine”. The second when it is componed with a preposition, which the verb that it cometh of, cannot be componed withal, as indoctus, innocens. The third when it formeth all the degrees of comparison, as amans, amantior, amantissimus; doctus, doctior, doctissimus. The fourth when it hath no respect nor express difference of time, as scripturus, “about to write”; homo laudatus, “a man laudable”; puer amandus that is amari dignus, “a child worthy to be loved”. And all these are called nouns participial.

Participles when they be changed into nouns require a genitive case, as fugitans litium, indoctus pilae, cupientissimus tui, lactis abundans.

These participial voices perosus, exosus, pertesus, have always the active signification, and govern an accusative case, as exosus sevitiam, “hating cruelty”; vitam pertesus, “weary of the life”.

 

The Adverb

Adverbs of quantity, time, and place, do require a genitive case, as multum lucri; tunc temporis; ubique gentium.

Certain adverbs will have a dative case like as the nouns that they come of, as venit obviam illi; canit similiter huic.

These datives be used adverbially, tempori, luci, vesperi, as tempori surgendum; vesperi cubandum; luce laborandum.

Certain adverbs will have an accusative case of the prepositions that they come of, as propius urbem, {n. p.} proxime castra.

Where note that prepositions, when they be set without a case, or else do form the degrees of comparison, be changed into adverbs.

 

The Conjunction

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives, and these four quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, couple like cases, as Xenophon et Plato fuere aequales; studui Romae et Athenis, and sometime they be put between diverse cases, as est liber meus et fratris; emi fundum centum nummis et pluris.

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives most commonly join like modes and tenses together, as Petrus et Ioannes precabantur et docebant. And sometimes otherwise, as et habetur et referetur a me gratia.

 

Preposition

Sometime this preposition in is not expressed but understanded as the casual word nevertheless put in the ablative case, as habeo te loco parentis id est in logo.

A verb compound sometime requireth the case of the preposition that he is componed with, as exeo domo; praetereo te insalutatum; adeo petrum.

 

The Interjection

Certain interjections require a nominative case, as o festus dies hominis. Certain a dative, as hei mihi. Certain an accusative, as heu stirpem invisam. Certain a vocative, as proh sancte Iupiter.

And the same proh will have also an accusative, as proh deum, atque hominum fidem.

 

The End

 

 

Concise treatise of all grammar, which our most cultured and distinguished King ordered to be circulated in that name, so that children throughout England would read nothing else but this one.

London, 1542.

 

To the schoolmasters and grammar teachers of all England.

 

Grammar has been deemed by some to be so unimportant and neglectable, that there has not been a lack of those, very studious men, who have mocked its simplicity with this epigram.

 

A happy grammarian does not exist, nor did he ever,

Nor is anyone with the name of grammarian happy.

But if anyone ever existed who was happy despite this fate,

Then he had abandoned the principles of grammar.

 

However, Quintilian avenges this most unjust slander by them, where he affirms that this profession of yours holds much more in secret, than offers in appearance; where he claims that it teaches the one and only correct method of speaking, reading, and writing; and that it investigates diligently not only poets, but every kind of writer; and that it passes judgment on any kind of literary endeavour. He equally deems unworthy of tolerance those who mock grammar as if it were an insignificant and limited thing: which, if it had not faithfully laid the foundations for the remaining disciplines, anything you were to build on top of it would easily collapse. Indeed, he says, grammar is necessary for children, enjoyable for elders, a sweet companion {A. ii.} of solitude, and at the same time the sole, among subjects of all kinds, which has more substance than appearance. There is no need, then, for this art to fear the bite of the sycophants, when it has been assigned such a defender. So it be that, although I do not doubt that this faculty of yours, just as proven true by the calculation of this one Fabius, either can nor should displease you, yet I am certain that it will be by far dearer to your entire people and senate when you will have understood that, on the other hand, it is not at all being ignored by our most magnificent and likewise well-learned King. For he, as he is well trained in all disciplines, and particularly in the study of sacred literature, neither despises these grammatical minutiae, nor does he leave them untouched. Moreover, when, thanks to his incomparable wisdom, he sensed how much of the youthful age of children is wasted, and, like in the beginning of the principle of the entire state, in this otherwise most thriving kingdom of his, even here it emerged day by day that there does not exist a rule for educating children in all parts of his territories that is one and straightforward, but manifold and diverse, according to the variation in different tastes: to these, when he had considered a little more deeply that many opportunities emerge every day and everywhere, because a not insignificant portion of young men are forced, given the circumstances, to change their home and school, and that therefore it necessarily happens that, due to the ever-changing teaching methods, even those first rudiments of grammar are approached by different preceptors in different manners, and that in the meantime, due to so many and so often repeated beginnings, nothing progresses, but either regresses crab-like, or at least remains immobile, always in the same footsteps.

When, I say, the most watchful mind of the king had turned again and again to these matters, and to the obstacles and afflictions of such kind in young minds, he easily understood that it was his responsibility, so that he ensured that, to the great inconvenience of his state, some immediate remedy to this was to be employed shortly. For this reason, he decreed that his assignment be delegated to a number of erudite men who had been trained at a grammar school in some way, who would compile a somewhat easy and distinctly concise collection of the rules of grammar, taken from all great writers of this genre, in the shape of a single volume, which he, with this law, ordered to be made public, so that, within the confines of his jurisdiction, you would not read anything other than that one to your disciples. However, this proclaim of the greatest and most just prince should not be understood as if it were an order to read anything written here according to the same standards to which it is written and without pause, and forcing it down the yet tender and nauseated throats of the children uninterruptedly and without discarding anything: as for the rest, it is entirely left to each of you, in order to capture his disciples, whichever method will seem more convenient to him, either to omit at his own discretion {A. iii.}, or to propose to his herd to learn, as long as he does not employ or teach, publicly or privately, anything other than this grammar. Moreover, it may be that you have gathered here, as briefly as possible, a certain summary approach to the entirety of your art: this, however, has been done better, in order for that which concerns the simple doctrine of the art not to appear to be missing to those of you who are looking for it, rather than for young and tender minds to appear to be overcome by all these things immediately upon their first attack. Wherefore, if you will have consulted this short piece of writing fairly and well, according to the nature of your profession, and if you will have taken care to explicate it accurately, with as much diligence as you can, to that immature flock, which in its entirety depends on your assistance, not only will you answer egregiously to the expectation of the most excellent prince, but you will also seem to have truly fulfilled your duty and to be working in order for this little treatise to appear, day by day, still more immaculate, and, if the work will be seen, even more authoritative.

Farewell.

 

To the reader.

Εγϰὼμιον τοῦ βασιλέοσ

 

Then there shall come the good fortune, then all

The prosperity, said the great Plato:

When knowledge meets a willing king,

Or when he who rules is inclined to wisdom.

If you believe that Plato said so there,

Anglia, why do you waste time being pleased with yourself?

Such a king is near you, as our ancestors have

Never seen, nor will our descendants be able to see.

Although I am omitting his physical gifts, with which he appears

Completely blessed, he soars immeasurably with his intellect.

Which kind of inclination is there, or which talents will you mention,

That that divine breast does not possess?

And although he is richly cultured in human inventions,

Yet the sacred law of Christ holds the first place.

Christ resides in his voice, the pious tongue speaks of Christ,

And Christ also occupies the heart of his king.

Whatever he does, speaks, thinks, everything is Christ.

Everywhere Christ directs his heart, mind, soul.

Hence it is so, that the piety and the glory of Christ,

As well as the love for the true religion, are our concern.

Ambiguity is henceforth banned, the Roman tyranny dies,

And shadowy heresy seeks the usual shelters.

Hence honest devotion finally raises its head, and

Shallow faith is crushed under its feet. {n. p.}

The impostor is eradicated, the spy everywhere pales,

The traitor himself falls into his own trap.

Human and divine laws are henceforth valid, the great passion

Of the ancestral piety possesses all, and nothing but sacred things is appreciated.

Hence both the existing laws and the State flourish.

Hence quiet, hence peace, hence all good things spread.

Then the arts flourish, the good doctrine is practiced.

A golden age emerges under this King.

And with the protection of this King, as if it were a good premonition,

This book is now brought to life to you.

And if you, British youth, do not accept it with a grateful spirit,

Then you are neither pious, nor grateful, nor appreciative of the work.

Despite its small size, this pamphlet brings great resources,

Which can however be acquired by everyone at a small price.

And although you may examine a thousand works by others,

You would not find anything clearer and more useful.

Thus may you, boy, remembering the one thanks to whom you reap so many advantages,

Always and most greatly praise such an erudite king.

Therefore, pray that he may live long, happy, and propitiously:

Then may he be deserving of ascending the heavenly house.

Κυριε σὣσον τὁν βασιλὲα {n. p.}

 

 

The most glaring mistakes

Folio

Page

Line

Read or delete

2

2

15

tn

ibidem

 

last

ambio

3

1

3

septentriones

5

1

3

origines

7

1

27

compellandis

9

1

19

inflexionis

10

2

20

delete histrix

11

2

8

ǐri

ibidem

 

10

presbyter

14

1

16

anomalia

17

2

1

anus

19

2

4

menses profluvium

20

1

28

fructu ac

21

1

last

piissimus

ibidem

2

1

ipsissimus

22

2

3

primitivam

23

1

23

tertiae

26

2

19

factane

ibidem

 

30

gratias

ibidem

 

31

sanatur

27

1

30

huius

28

1

4

significant

31

1

last

delete et sic

ibidem

2

28

alitumque

33

2

21

dabitur quem

34

2

2

inquio

35

1

25

coniugantur

36

2

10

nexus

37

2

24

doctissimus quisque

{n. p.}

Folio

Page

Line

Read or delete

40

1

penult.

pedetentim

48

2

4

ingenui

49

2

2

significat

50

1

26

plenae

52

1

6

adsimules

61

2

29

numerumque referre

62

2

12

calidus

63

1

12

consedimus

66

2

11

coactae

67

1

29

laeserunt

ibidem

 

last

studes

76

1

16

inis

In that very place, soon after the last line you must add

 

amo

 

porro

virgo

legendo, gerundium.

And you must erase those same voices in the following page, lines seven and eight. {n. p.}

 

Of Grammar and Its Parts

 

Grammar is the art of writing and speaking properly.

Grammar has four parts.

 

orthography

 

syntax

etymology

prosody

{n. p.}

 

Of Orthography

Orthography is the method for writing correctly, by which we are taught how and by which letters every word must be formed, as lectio, not lexio, from ὀρθός “correct”, and γραϕϰ “writing”.

 

Of Letters

Among twenty-two letters, there are five vowels

 

a

 

o

e

u

i

and Greek y

Among them, different letters join together in compounds of five diphthongs

ae

 

 

 

musae

au

 

audio

oe

as

coelum

ei

 

hei

eu

 

euge

The remaining letters are called consonants, nine of which are mute {B}

 

b

 

k

c

p

d

q

f

t

 

g

 

 

While seven are semivowels

 

l

 

s

m

x

n

z

r

 

Among them

 

l

 

 

m

are liquid

n

 

r


However, s is a letter whose rule is particular: sometimes it becomes liquid as well.

X, z and i in the middle of two vowels are likewise double consonants.

I and u can also be added to consonants when they are put before themselves or before other vowels in the same syllable, as

 

voluntas

 

Iuno

vultus

Iovis

K, y, and z are never combined in Latin speech.

H is not a letter, but a sign of aspiration. Moreover, it is put before all the vowels, as

 

hamus

 

homo

hebenus

humus

hiatus

hymnus

Actually, not before any consonant. Therefore, we pronounce in this manner

 

hiulcus

 

trisyllable

 

Hieronymus

 

pentasyllable

Hiacchus

 

Hieremias

 

And yet in Latin speech sometimes h is put after c, as {n. p.}

 

charus

pulcher

Letters are represented in two ways, of course with capital or small characters: capital letters do begin the sentences and proper names, as

 

Deum time

 

Henricus

Regem honora

Anglia

The way in which diphthongs are written must be carefully observed: how, for instance, they can be both composed and signed,

as

 

musæ

 

or

 

musę

præsunt

 

praęsunt

When only few or single capital letters are written, sometimes they indicate a forename, sometimes a number, as

A.

Aulus

P.C.

Patres conscripti

C.

Caius

Q.

Quintus, Quaestor, Quirites

D.

Decius

R.P.

Respublica

G.

Gaius

Sp.

Spurius

L.

Lucius

Sex.

Sextus

M.

Marcus

T.

Titus

P.

Publius

T.C.

Tua Clementia and

P.R.

Populus Romanus

 

infinite nouns of this kind.

 

 

 

And in the case of numbers

I.

 

 

 

unum

V.

 

quinque

IX.

 

novem

X.

 

decem

XL.

 

quadraginta

L.

means

quinquaginta

XC.

 

nonaginta

C.

 

centum

D.

 

 

 

quingenta

M.

 

 

 

mille

{B. ii.}

 

Of the Differences between Syllables

To learn how to write correctly it is first of all necessary to distinguish and connect syllables properly while writing. In plain words, bd is attached to the following vowel, as

 

a – bdomen

a – bdera

Indeed, this is the rule which must be followed

ct, as

 

do – ctus

gm

 

a – gmen

 

san – ctus

gn, as

i – gnis

ps, as

scri – psi

 

ve – ster

 

sum – psi

st, as

magi – ster

sc, as

pi – scis

 

an – xius

 

di – sco

x, as

di – xi

tn, as

e – tna and similar

 

 

Among m and n there must not be a p. Therefore, it is wrongly represented

sompnus

 

instead of

 

somnus

columpna

 

columna

After x an s must not be written, as

excribo

 

and not

 

exscribo

exolvo

 

exsolvo

In compounds with a preposition, both a sensitive hearing and euphonies must be pleased, as

 

occurro

 

 

 

obcurro

officio

better than

obficio

aufero

 

abfero and conversely

abstineo

 

austineo

obtineo

but not

ottineo

obrepo

 

orrepo

Furthermore, because of this, consonants are sometimes inserted in compounds too, as

 

redamo

 

ambigo

redeo

 

ambeo

 

Of Orthoepy

Orthoepy is similar to Orthography. It is the correct method for properly speaking, from ὀρθός, correct, and ἔποϛ, word.

This must be especially regarded, so that teachers can mould and refine the tender and babbling mouths of children, and also do not hasten the conversation into a continuous volubility of tongue, so that, unless voice is missing, they never fall short in eloquence or conversely fall silent with respect to any single sound with a long breathing pause, belching, laughter, sobbing, hawking, or cough, which inappropriately interrupt the course of speech.

Besides, children must be first of all refrained from those defects which are almost seen to be proper of our population.

They are of this kind

 

iotacism

 

traulism

lambdacism

 

plateasm

 

ischnotes

 

and similar

It is said to be iotacism when the letter i has got a sound which is too rich, and drawls more than it is appropriate. This defect is produced especially by our compatriots of Northern England.

Lambdacism is when someone pronounces an l with an exceedingly strenuous sound, as

 

ellucet

instead of

 

lucet

sallavus

 

salvus

Another defect is thrust by our compatriots, clearly because they pronounce these letters more thickly than what is proper, so

 

 

multus

 

 

muultus

instead of

mollis

it is heard

moollis

 

falsus

 

faalsus

Ischnotes is a certain slenderness of speaking, every time as we pronounce some syllables in a slenderer and simpler way than the natural one, so that {B. iii.}

 

 

nunc

 

 

nync

instead of

tunc

we pronounce

tync

 

aliquis

 

eliquis

 

alius

 

elius

Traulism is a certain hesitance and stammering of pronunciation, when the same syllable is too often repeated at the same time, as

 

cacacanit

instead of

 

canit

Tututullius

 

Tullius

Fabius believes that error, which is just as dangerous as it is bad, should be remedied in the following way, i.e. – if it were asked by the pupils – for the children to pronounce as quickly as possible nouns and verses of unnatural difficulty made of many, interconcatenated and very harsh syllables, all joined and equally difficult, as

 

Arx, tridens, rostris, sphinx, prester, torrida seps, strix.

Postquam discordia tetra,

Belli ferratos postes, portasque refregit.

 

Plateasm is when we struggle for a deeper and more mature voice to speak, so that

 

 

montes

 

 

muntes

 

instead of

fontes

we exasperate

funtes

 

 

pontes

 

puntes

and also

 

ergo

 

argo

 

instead of

sperma

we exasperate

sparma

 

 

perago

 

parago

 

And, in other respects among our compatriots, there are also those who instead of v pronounce f, and on the contrary f instead of v, as

 

folo

 

 

volo

fis

 

vis

folui

instead of

volui

felle

 

velle. And conversely

 

vero

 

fero

vers

instead of

fers

 

verre

 

 

ferre

{n. p.}

When s is in between two intermediate vowels, some people produce an impure sound:

 

 

 

laesus

 

 

lezus

instead of

visus

they pronounce

vizus

 

risus

 

rizus



H at the beginning of utterance is milder, while it is preferred to deliver a harder pronunciation when h is in the middle. Therefore, wrongly,

 

 

 

homo

 

 

omo

instead of

hamus

 

amus

 

humus

 

umus

 

 

 

Christus

 

 

Cristus

instead of

chrisma

we exasperate

crisma

 

chremes

 

cremes

 

 

 

thus

 

 

tus

instead of

diphthongus

 

diptongus

 

sphaera

 

spaera

Our compatriots make another shameful mistake when they pronounce t and d just as if they were aspirated, as

 

 

amath

 

 

amat

caputh

instead of

caput

aputh

 

apud

But this kind of defects are almost countless in anyone who aspires to be well lettered, and we bequeath to the diligence of preceptors to correct them.

 

Of the Punctuation of Sentences

Not a scant part of orthography seems to consist of the proper separation of sentences. Accordingly, it will not be redundant to remark a few things on the distinction of clauses. Therefore, points or marks, of which the learned make use in writing, are called by our countrymen {n. p.}

 

 

minor punctuation

 

comma

middle separation

in Greek

colon

full and perfect separation

period

Minor punctuation or comma is the mark of silence, through which the limit of the sentence is thus suspended, but with the persistence of the meaning, so that anything that follows could immediately advance, and it is written with a point tailed beneath, as

Utendum est aetate, cito pede praeterit aetas:

Nec bona tam sequitur, quam bona prima fuit.

Likewise, the single parts of the sentence are separated through this mark, as

Grammaticus, rhetor, geometres, pictor, aliptes

Graeculus esuriens in caelum, iusseris, ibit.

Middle separation or colon is when what has already been said of the sentence generally remains, and it is a perfect part of the sentence, and two points must be observed, as quemadmodum horologii umbram progressam sentimus, progredientem non cernimus, et fruticem aut herbam crevisse apparet, crescere autem nulli cernitur: ita et ingeniorum profectus, quoniam minutis constat auctibus, ex intervallo sentitur.

Full separation, which is also called period, is put after complete sentences, and it is also marked by a simple full stop, as

Dic mihi musa virum captae post tempora Troiae:

Qui mores hominum multorum vidit et urbes.

Among these, we usually include

 

brackets

question mark

Brackets are used when a sentence that is included between two small half-moons is removed and the utterance remains nevertheless complete, as

Princeps (quia bella miniantur hostes) militibus urbes praemunit et armis.

The question mark is marked by two points, but the upper one is tailed, as

Et quae tanta fuit Romam tibi causa videndi? {n. p.}

 

Of Etymology

Etymology deals first of all with the investigation into the origins of words, as if caelebs was almost said caelestem vitam agens, if lepus almost levipes. But etymology, since we are now discussing it, is the method to learn the differences between cases, as fortis, fortiter, lego, legit. Cicero instead calls etymology veriloquium. Moreover, it is composed of ἔτυμοσ “right”, et λόγοσ “speech”.

 

Of the Parts of Speech

There are eight parts of speech

 

noun

 

adverb

pronoun

conjunction

verb

preposition

 

participle

 

interjection

 

Of Nouns

A noun is that part of speech which means a thing, without any difference between time or person.

A noun is called in two ways

 

substantive

 

 

adjective

A substantive is that which does not require anything to be added to express its meaning.

But a substantive is twofold

 

appellative

 

 

proper

An appellative is that which indicates a thing common to many people, as {C}

 

homo

 

iustitia

lapis

bonitas

A proper is that which means a thing proper to one individual, as

 

Iesus

 

Londinum

Maria

Thamesis

Proper names are of three kinds. First name, which is put in front of a distinguishing position, or due to an ancient use, as

 

Lucius

 

Aulus

Publius

Marcus

Name, which is what is proper to every single person, as

 

Petrus

 

Cato

Paulus

Tullius

Surname, which is established from consanguinity, as

 

Gracchus

 

Scipio

Fabius

Cicero

or from the relation to some places, as

Africanus

Macedonicus

 

Germanicus

An adjective requires to be joined to a substantive in the speech, as

 

piger

 

candidus

alacris

clemens

An adjective is twofold

 

common

proper

It is common when it indicates a disposition common to many people, as

 

bonus

 

solers

malus

satur

It is proper when it indicates a disposition peculiar and indivisible from someone, as

 

Gradivus, proper noun for Mars

Quirinus, proper noun for Romulus

{n. p.}

 

Of the Variation of Nouns

Nouns have seven variations

 

type

 

gender

figure

declension

 

number

 

comparison

 

case

 

 

 

Of Type

The type of a noun is twofold

 

primitive, which does not derive from a different source

derivative, which is formed from a different source

Primitives include these which follow, and suchlike.

Certainly, the collective noun, when a singular number indicates a great number, as

 

concio

 

plebs

caetus

turba

The onomatopoeic noun, which is adapted from a sound, as

 

sibilus

 

stridor

tintinnabulum

clangor

Interrogative nouns, as

 

quis

 

quantus

uter

quot

 

qualis

 

numquis

Which sometimes change in concordance with the infinite, sometimes with the relative.

 

Correlative nouns, which answer to an interrogative, as

 

talis

tantus

 

tot

Numeral, to whom these qualities are related.

Cardinal, from which other numbers descend as from a source, as

 

unus

 

tres

duo

quatuor

Ordinal, as

 

primus

 

tertius

secundus

quartus

 

{C. ii.}

Distributive, as

 

singuli

 

terni

bini

quaterni

Partitive, which means either many things or singularity, as

 

quisque

 

uterque

unusquisque

neuter

Or one among many, as

 

alter

 

cetera

aliquis

reliquus

Universal, as

 

omins

 

nullus

cunctus

nemo

Particular, as

 

aliquis

 

ullus

quisquam

quidam

A derivative also has subordinate qualities.

Certainly verbal, as

 

lectio

 

auditus

litura

aratrum

Patronymic, as

 

Eboracensis

 

Oxoniensis

Londinensis

Etonensis

Related to lineage, as

 

Graecus

 

Hebraeus

Latinus

Anglus

Patronymic nouns which come from both a father or from a different person from the family, as

 

Aeacides, son or grandson of Aeacus

Nerine, daughter or granddaughter of Nereus

 

Latoides, son of Latona

 

Menelais, wife of Menelaus

Diminutive, as

 

regulus

 

maiusculus

popellus

minusculus

Possessive, as

 

herilis

 

regius

servilis

paternus

Material, as

 

faginus

 

gemmeus

lapideus

aureus

Local, as

 

hortensis

 

marinus

agrestis

montanus

{n. p.}

Adverbial, as

 

hesternus

 

crastinus

hodiernus

clandestinus

Participial, as

 

amandus

docendus

And those ending in lis, as

 

fictilis

 

flexilis

coctilis

pensilis

 

Of Figure

Figures can be simple, as iustus, or compound, as iniustus. There are some which increase and derive from a compound word, as irreparabilis.

 

Of Number

There are two numbers.

Singular, relating to one, as pater.

Plural, relating to many, as patres.

 

Of Case

There are six cases.

Nominative, which is also called rectus, straight, is the first voice, with which we call a certain thing.

Genitive, which means whose such a thing could be. And also, it is usually called patrius casus, the paternal case, gignendi casus the generative case, or interrogandi casus, the asking case.

Dative, also called dandi casus, the giving case, by which we attribute some things to someone. Under this word we also include the eighth case, as it clamor caelo, that is in caelum.

Accusative – which can be called both incusativus, accusing, or causativus, causative– follows the verb, as amo patrem.

Vocative, which is also called salutatorium, the greeting case, is employed to call or to address people.

Ablative, by which we indicate that something is obtained by someone. We call this sextus, the sixth, and latinus, the Latin case, because it is truly peculiar of the Latins. {C. iii.}

 

Of Gender

Gender is the difference between the sexes, and there are seven genders

 

masculine, whose mark is hic

feminine, haec

neuter, hoc

common, hic and haec

common of three, hic, haec, and hoc

doubtful, hic or haec

epicene or indiscriminate, when under one single word we can include both sexes and genders, as hic anser, haec aquila.

While in order to properly understand the gender of nouns, you must assimilate the following rules with utmost diligence: and for this you must acknowledge William Lily.

 

General Rules of the Proper Nouns

Proper nouns which are attributed to men are called masculine, as are those of the gods Mars, Bacchus, Apollo. Of the men, as Cato, Vergilius. Of the rivers, as Tybris, Orontes. Of the months, as October. Of the winds, as Libs, Notus, Auster.

 

Proper nouns concerning female kind

Are attributed to feminine gender: whether they be nouns of

goddesses, as Iuno, Venus. Of women, as Anna, Philotis.

Of cities, as Elis, Opus. Of countries, as Graecia, Persis.

Likewise, the names of islands, as Creta, Britannia, Cyprus.

 

Nevertheless, some cities must be removed, such as

Mascula, Sulmo, Agragas. Some are neuter, as Argos,

Tybur, Praeneste, and the people of Anxio, for which both are allowed. {n. p.}

 

General Rules of the Appellatives

Appellatives of the trees will be feminine, as alnus,

Cupressus, cedrus. Spinus is masculine, oleaster is masculine.

And siler, suber, thus, robur, and acer, are neuter.

 

Epicene

 

Also are of birds, as passer, hirundo. Of wild beasts,

As tygris, vulpes, and of fish, as ostrea, coetus.

We call epicene a word which tells itself its own suitable gender.

 

Nevertheless, from all that we said before, it must be noticed

That all those that end in um, either Greek or Latin,

Are of the neuter gender. Thus, they are invariable nouns.

 

But now, for what concerns the remaining nouns which are called appellatives,

Or which behave just like appellatives, I will formulate a rule,

For the gender of these nouns can be distinguished according to the genitive,

As the three special rules below will point out.

 

First Special Rule

A noun which does not originate from the genitive, as caro carnis,

Capra caprae, nubes nubis, is of the feminine gender.

 

Since our Lily teaches how to distinguish the gender of appellative nouns from the genitive, pupils must be warned at this point: this first rule is that not all appellative nouns originate from the genitive.

Their genders are in all respects of the first and fourth inflections, and also of the second, besides a certain few which will be discovered below, in the exceptions to the third rule. The great part of the third declension nouns which are of this kind are likewise related to this class {n. p.}

 

 

labes, labis

 

mater, matris

pestis, pestis

cubile, cubilis

 

vis genitive vis

 

caro, carnis

 

Masculine

Many things of men are called masculine with a,

As scriba, assecla, scurra, and rabula, lixa, lanista,

Greek masculine nouns follow the first declension

Ending in as, and in es, and those derived from what is made in a,

As satrapas satrapa, athletes athleta. Likewise

verres, natalis, aqualis are masculine, born from assis,

as centussis. You should add lienis, and orbis,

Callis, caulis, follis, collis, mensis, and ensis,

Fustis, funis, panis, penis, crinis, and ignis,

Cassis, fascis, torris, sentis, piscis, and unguis,

And vermis, vectis, postis, societur, and axis.

Masculine nouns in er, as venter. In os, or us, as logos, annus.

Nouns of the feminine gender are mater, humus, domus, alvus,

And colus, and of the fourth, as a fruit ficus, and acus,

Porticus, and tribus, socrus, nurus, and manus, idus,

Here anus must be added, here mystica vannus Iacchi.

Change the os ending of these words into us to turn it to Greek papyrus,

Antidotus, costus, diphthongus, byssus, abyssus,

Crystallus, synodus, saphirus, eremus, and arctus

With many others, which now it would be tedious to write in detail.

 

Neuter

Neuter nouns in e when they make is, as mare, rete.

And those which result in on, or in um, as barbiton, ovum.

The gender of hippomanes is neuter, and neuter cacoethes,

And virus, pelagus: neuter modo, but masculine for modo vulgus. {n. p.}

 

Doubtful

Nouns of doubtful gender are talpa and dama, canalis,

Halcyonis, finis, clunis, restis, penus, amnis,

Pampinus and corbis, linter, torquis, specus, anguis.

The fruit ficus which gives fici, and phaselus,

Lecythus, and atomus, grossus, pharus, and paradisus.

 

Common

Nouns compound from a verb ending in a are of the common of the two gender,

Graiugena from gigno, agricola from colo, this advena shows to be

From venio, you can add senex, auriga, and verna, sodalis,

Vates, extorris, patruelis, and per duellis,

Affinis, iuvenis, testis, civis, canis, hostis.

 

Second Special Rule

If the penultimate syllable of the genitive case makes an

acute sound, just as these, pietas pietatis,

Virtus virtutis, the noun is of the feminine gender.

 

Here observe that those which sharpen the penultimate syllable originate from the genitive, and all are of the fifth inflection, except fides. Similarly, all monosyllabic nouns, except vis. All the remaining are of the third declension, thus all inflect

 

 

c

 

 

halec, halecis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

delphin

 

nis

 

 

n

 

 

titan

 

 

in

 

 

as

 

infans

 

antis

 

 

ans

 

 

quadrans

 

 

 

 

ens

 

 

continens

 

entis

 

 

 

 

 

triens

 

 

 

 

uns

 

 

decuns, decuntis

 

 

{D}

Greek nouns in er which are written in ir, as

 

crater

 

êris

 

character

 

 

Latin nouns in er pertain to the third rule, whereby feminine is not properly placed in in this group.

 

 

inx

 

Syrinx, Syringis

 

 

 

 

anx

 

phalanx, phalangis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

deunx

uncis

 

In

 

unx

as

 

septunx

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

effrons

ontis

 

 

 

ons

 

 

bifrons

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

cohors

ortis

 

 

 

ors

 

 

consors

 

 

Except Latin nouns in o, which have ônis and ênis in the genitive,

 

 

lectio

 

ônis

as

 

ligo

 

 

 

 

anio

 

ênis

Except a few gentiles, which belong to the third rule,

 

 

Macedo

 

 

 

 

Brito

 

 

as

 

Saxo

 

ǒnis

 

 

Vangio

 

 

 

 

Lingo

 

 

Those in al are neuter, as

 

vectigal

 

âlis

the others in l follow the third rule.

 

animal

 

 

 

In en, which have ênis in genitive, as

 

lien

 

ênis

the others follow the third rule.

 

Siren

 

 

 

In Greek ων, which maintain ω in the genitive, as

 

damon

 

ωnis

 

 

Ladon

 

 

 

Certain vary, as {n. p.}

 

Orion

 

 

 

 

Edon

 

ônis, ǒnis

the others follow the third rule.

 

Egeon

 

 

 

In ar, as

 

 

 

 

 

 

iubar

 

 

 

laquear

 

 

 

 

nectar

 

ǎris

 

exemplar

 

âris

except

 

arar

 

 

 

calcar

 

 

 

 

hepar

 

hepǎtis

In the Latin or, as

 

 

timor

 

ôris

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

soror

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

arbor

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

marmor

 

 

 

rhetor

 

 

except

 

aequor

 

ǒris and some Greek nouns

 

Hector

 

ǒris

 

 

ador

 

 

 

Nestor

 

 

 

 

memor

 

 

 

 

 

 

In the Latin as, as

 

maiestas

 

âtis.

 

 

Anas, Anǎtis

 

 

 

lenitas

 

 

except

 

and certain Greek nouns

 

 

 

 

 

 

lampas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

monas

 

ǎdis

In es, as

 

quies

 

 

 

haeres

 

êdis

 

magnes

 

êtis

 

merces

 

 

 

locuples

 

 

 

meridies

 

meridiêi

And Greek nouns, whose genitive ends in êtis, as

 

lebes

 

êtis

the others follow the third rule.

 

tapes

 

 

 

Nouns in is, which make îtis in the genitive, are gentiles, as

 

Samnis

 

îtis

 

Salamis

înis

 

Quiris

 

 

 

Trachis

 

 

Psophis

 

îdis

 

semis essis

 

 

Crenis

 

 

 

 

 

The others follow the third rule. {D. ii.}

 

In os, as

 

custos

ôdis

except

compos

ǒtis

 

 

rhinoceros

ôtis

 

impos

 

 

In us, which make ûtis, ûdis, and ûris in the genitive, as

 

salus, ûtis

 

 

palus, ûdis

except pecus pecǔdis

 

tellus, ûris

 

In ax, as

 

limax

 

 

 

abax

 

 

 

fornax

 

 

 

smilax

 

 

 

thorax

 

âcis. Except

 

dropax

 

ǎcis

 

bibax

 

 

 

storax

 

 

 

nugax

 

 

 

styrax

 

 

And certain patronymics, as

 

Pharnax

ǎcis

 

Candax

Syphax both varies âcis or ǎcis.

In ex, as

 

vervex, vervêcis

 

compounds from lex,

 

 

vibex, vibîcis

 

exlex, exlêgis.

The others follow the third rule.

 

 

lodix

 

 

and words in trix, as

 

 

 

histrix

 

 

 

victrix

 

îcis

 

In ix, as

 

phaenix

 

îcis

 

nutrix

 

 

 

 

pernix

 

 

 

the others follow the third rule.

 

 

 

felix

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In yx, as

 

bombyx, bombŷcis

 

Yet Bebryx varies in Bebrŷcis, Bebry̌cis. The others follow the third rule.

In ox, as

 

celox

 

 

 

velox

 

ôcis

except Cappadox, Cappadǒcis

In ux, as Pollux, Pollûcis. The others follow the third rule.

In Greek s, after p, as

 

hydrops

ôpis

conops

ôpis

 

Cyclops

 

cercops

 

The others follow the third rule. {n. p.}

 

Masculine

Certain monosyllabic nouns are said to be masculine,

Sal, sol, ren, and splen, car, ser, vir, vas vadis, as, mas,

Bes, cres, pres, and pes, glis gliris, they have the genitive,

Mos, flos, ros, and tros, mus, dens, mons, pons, and also fons,

Seps instead of serpente, gryps, Thrax, rex, grex gregis, and Phryx.

Polysyllables in n are also masculine, as Acarnan,

Lichen, and delphin. And in o those marking concrete nouns,

As leo, curculio, so senio, ternio, sermo.

Masculine in er, or, and os, like crater, conditor, heros,

So torrens, nefrens, oriens, with plurals in dens,

Like bidens, when it is found before a tool.

You can add gigas, elephas, adamas, and Garamas, and tapes,

And lebes, cures, magnes, and a single noun as meridies,

A noun of the fifth, and those which are compound from nothing,

As dodrans, semis. We must add to the masculine Samnis,

Hydrops, nycticorax, thorax, and the masculine also includes vervex,

Phoenix, and bombyx, instead of vermiculo. However, some of these nouns

Are of the feminine gender, siren, mulier, soror, uxor.

 

Neuter

The neuter gender includes both these monosyllabic nouns mel, sel,

Lac, far, ver, cor, aes, vas vasis, os ossis and oris,

Rus, thus, ius, crus, pus. And polysyllables in al, and in ar,

As capital, laquear. Halec is neuter and feminine.

 

Doubtful

These nouns are of the doubtful gender, python, scrobis, serpens, bubo, rudens, grus,

Perdix, linx, limax, stirps for trunco, pedis and calx,

You can add dies, which is masculine only in the plural number.

 

Common

Common nouns inlcude parens, autor, infans, adolescens,

Dux, illex, haeres, exlex, those made from fronte,

As bifrons, custos, bos, fur, sus, and sacerdos. {D. iii.}

 

Third and Last Special Rule

If the penultimate syllable of the genitive case

Is short, as sanguis, genitive sanguinis, the originated nouns are masculine.

 

These nouns have the stress on the penultimate syllable of the genitive. In a few cases their gender is of the second inflexion, as one may see

 

socer

 

 

 

 

 

gener

ěri

 

 

levir

 

puer

 

compounds from vir

 

Triumvir

ǐri

 

adulter

 

 

 

Decemvir

 

presbyter, ecclesiastic voice

 

                 centumvir

 

 

 

 

 

armiger

 

from fero

 

caducifer

 

ěri

from gero

claudiger

ěri

 

 

Lucifer

 

 

and some

 

 

tener

 

ěri

 

adjectives

 

 

satur

 

ǔri

 

 

 

a

 

 

poema

ǎtis

 

 

 

 

 

dogma

 

in

 

yr

 

 

martyr

marty̌ris

 

 

ur

as

 

augur

ǔris

 

 

 

 

 

murmur

 

 

 

t

 

 

caput

pitis

 

 

 

 

 

occiput

 

 

And also a few in

o

 

imago

 

or

 

arbor

 

ǒris

 

 

ordo

inis

 

 

Aeginor

 

 

l

 

Hannibal

 

as

 

chilias

 

chiliâdis

 

 

consul

lis

 

 

anas

 

anâtis

so

 

mugil

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tibicen

 

es

 

fomes

 

itis

in en

 

carmen

inis

 

 

limes

 

 

 

 

canon

 

in is

 

lapis

 

idis

on

 

daemon

onis

 

 

pollis

 

inis

{n. p.}

ar

 

iubar

 

ǎris

er

 

puer

 

ěri

 

 

 

nectar

 

 

 

 

anser

 

ěris

 

s goes before

 

princeps

 

principis

 

os

 

compos

 

ǒtis

consonants

 

hiems

 

hiěmis

 

 

 

impos

 

 

in us as

 

corpus

 

ǒris

 

ax

 

abax

 

ǎcis

 

 

 

 

 

vellus

 

ěris

 

 

 

storax

 

 

 

 

 

ex

 

index

 

icis

ix

 

fornix

 

icis

 

 

 

 

vindex

 

 

 

 

calix

 

 

 

 

ox

 

precox

 

ǒcis

ux

 

coniux

 

ǔgis

 

 

 

 

Cappadox

 

 

 

 

redux

 

ǔcis

 

 

 

Feminine

Hyperdisyllabic nouns in do, which make dinis,

And in go, which make ginis in the genitive, are of the feminine gender.

For you should make dulcedo in dulcedinis, and

Compago shows to be compaginis. You must add virgo,

Grando, fides, compes, teges, and seges, arbor, and hiems,

thus bacchar, sindon, Gorgon, icon, and Amazon.

Greek nouns ending in as or in is, as lampas, iaspis,

Cassis, cuspis, a single voice in us makes pecus in pecudis.

These nouns forfex, pellex, carex, and likewise suppellex,

Appendix, histrix, coxendix, and you must add filix.

 

Neuter

The neuter gender, designating inanimate things, include

Nouns in a, as problema, en as omen, ar as iubar, as dans,

as iecur, us as onus, put as occiput. However, among these

Pecten, furfur are masculine. Neuter nouns include cadaver,

Verber, iter, suber, fungo instead of tuber, and uber,

Gingiber, and laser, cicer, and piper, and papaver,

And siser, and siler. To the neuter gender belong aequor, marmor, and ador, {n. p.}

And pecus, when it makes pecoris in the genitive.

 

Doubtful

Cardo, margo, cinis, obex, pulvis, adeps, forceps,

pumex, ramex, anas, imbrex are of the doubtful gender.

You must add culix, natrix, and onyx with compounds, and silex,

Although this would better be called for a masculine use.

 

Common

The common gender includes these, vigil, pugil, exul,

Praesul, homo, nemo, martyr, Ligur, augur, and Archas,

Antistes, miles, pedes, interpres, comes, hospes,

thus ales, praeses, princeps, auceps, eques, obses,

And many other nouns coming from verbs,

As coniux, index, vindex, opifex, and aruspex.

 

General rule of the adjectives

When adjectives have just one voice,

As felix, audax, and all gender is under one voice.

If the voice falls under a double voice, just as omnis and omne,

The former voice of the two is common, the latter voice is neuter.

But if there are three varying voices, as sacer, sacra, sacrum,

The first voice is masculine, the second feminine, the third is neuter.

But there are some adjectives which you would nearly call substantives because of their inflexion,

Yet they are considered as adjectives because of their nature and use,

Such are pauper, puber, with degener, uber,

And dives, locuples, sospes, comes, and superstes,

With some few others which a proper study will teach you.

These adjectives are glad to take for themselves a certain particular inflexion,

Campester, volucer, celiber, celer, and saluber,

You can add pedester, equester, and acer, add paluster,

And alacer silvester. But you will have to vary these as follows:

Hic celer, haec celeris, neuter hoc celere. Or otherwise, in this way:

Hic and haec celeris, on the contrary hoc celere is neuter.

It must be observed that adjectives are those words lacking gender:

This and other things will be discussed elsewhere. {n. p.}

 

Of Declensions

Declensions are the variations of words by case. There are five declensions.

 

First Declension

The first declension includes four terminations

 

a

 

 

mensa

 

as

as

 

Aeneas

 

es

 

 

Anchises

 

e

 

 

Penelope

Furthermore, Greek nouns include all those which end in

 

as

 

 

 

Thomas

 

es

 

as

 

Ioannes

 

e

 

 

 

Phebe

And there are also some Hebrew nouns in am, as

 

Adam, Adae

 

Abraham, Abrahae

Which nevertheless could be better rendered in the Latin form, and inflected in this manner:

 

Adamus, Adami

 

Abrahamus, Abrahami

As makes the accusative in an, as

 

Aeneas

 

the vocative is in a, as

 

Aeneas

 

Aenean

 

 

 

Aenea

Es obtains en in the accusative, as

 

Anchises

 

the vocative and ablative in e or a, as

 

Anchise, or

 

Anchisen

 

 

 

Anchisa

E makes the genitive in es, the dative in e, the accusative in en, the vocative and the ablative in e, as

 

Penelope

 

Penelopen

 

Penelopes

 

Penelope

 

Penelope

 

Penelope

Familias in the genitive of Latin nouns is sometimes found {E} to imitate Greek nouns, as

 

pater familias

 

filius familias etc.

The same which our forefathers observed in many other nouns.

Ennius, dux ipse vias.

Livius Andronicus, Mercurius, cumque eo filius Latonas.

Thus Nevius, filii terras, pro terrae.

Vergil, nec auras, nec sonitus memor.

You will leave aulai and pictai, and other nouns of this kind, to the ancients.

The genitive plural sometimes admits a syncope, as

 

Aneadûm

 

instead of

 

Aeneadarum

 

Graiugenûm

 

 

 

Graiugenarum

These nouns form plural datives and ablatives in abus.

 

dea

 

 

Equa

 

mula

 

 

liberta. These nouns end in is and in abus as well.

 

filia

 

 

 

nata

 

 

 

Second Declension

The terminations of the second declension are

 

er

 

 

Aper

 

ir

 

 

Vir

 

ur

as

 

satur

 

us

 

 

dominus

 

um

 

 

templum

And of Greek nouns in

 

Os

 

 

Delos

 

On

as

 

Ilion

 

Eus

 

 

Orpheus

Attic nouns in os make the genitive in o, the accusative in on, as

Androgeos

 

accusative Androgeon

Androgeo

 

 

Some Greek nouns contracted in us make the vocative in u, as {n. p.}

 

Panthus

 

 

Panthu

 

Oedipus

 

 

Oedipu

You must also notice that some Latin nouns make the singular vocative both in us and in e, as

 

Agnus

 

fluvius

 

Vulgus

 

chorus

 

Lucus

 

populus, instead of natione

Nouns in eus make the genitive both in ei or eos, the dative in ei, the accusative in ea, the vocative in eu, as

 

Orpheus

 

Orphea, Ovidius, Orpheon

 

Orphei, or Orpheos

 

Orpheu

 

Orphei

 

Orpheo

Finally, these syncopations must be noticed

 

deûm

 

instead of

 

Deorum

 

virûm

 

 

 

virorum

Likewise, irregular nouns ambobus and duobus, and also ambo and duo: poets use these two voices also in the accusative masculine.

Vergil, si duo praeterea tales idea tulisset terra viros.

Horace, ne vos titillet gloria, iureiurando obstringam ambo.

 

Third Declension

The third declension is completely different: here I will briefly mention only its more difficult cases.

Some accusatives are only declined in um, as

 

vim

 

 

 

maguderim

 

 

 

ravim

 

 

 

amussim

 

 

 

tussim

 

 

 

Charibdim

 

 

 

sitim

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

and also the accusative of some rivers as

 

 

 

Tibrim

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ararim

 

 

 

 

{E. ii.}

Some nouns decline the accusative in im and in em, as

 

buris

 

turris

 

pelvis

 

restis

 

clavis

 

febris

 

securis

 

navis

 

puppis

 

bipennis

 

torquis

 

aqualis

The ablative regularly ends in e, as

 

pectus

 

Ablative

 

pectore

 

salus

 

 

 

salute

Proper nouns are similar to adjectives, and make the ablative in e

as

 

felice

 

Martiale

 

clemente

 

Iuvenale etc.

But the neuter nouns ending in al, ar, and e for the most part make the ablative in i, as

 

vectigal

 

 

 

Vectigali

 

calcar

 

ablative

 

Calcari

 

mare

 

 

 

Mari

The ablative rete is from the nominative retis, and not from the nominative rete.

Par with its compounds has both e and i, as

 

par

 

ablative

 

pare

 

or ri

 

compar

 

 

 

compare

 

 

Yet these nouns maintain e

 

far

 

Nectar

 

hepar

 

gausape

 

iubar

 

praesepe,

and these proper names

 

Soracte

 

 

 

Praeneste

 

 

 

Reate

 

 

The names of holidays that are only plural sometimes make the genitive in orum, as

 

Agonalia

 

genitive

 

Agonaliorum

 

Vinalia

 

 

 

Vinaliorum

{n. p.}

Sometimes also in ium, as

 

Floralia

 

genitive

 

Floralium

 

Feralia

 

 

 

Feralium

But sometimes also in orum or ium, as

 

Parentalia

 

genitive

 

Parentaliorum

 

or ium

 

Saturnalia

 

 

 

Saturnaliorum

 

 

But datives and ablatives in bus, as

 

Saturnalibus

 

 

 

Bacchanalibus

 

 

Except from Quinquatria which forms its cases according to the second declension.

The nouns of months in er and is make the ablative only in i, as

September

 

ablative

 

Septembri

Aprilis

 

 

 

Aprili

Nouns whose accusative only ends in im, has its ablative end in i, as

sitim

 

ablative

 

siti

tussim

 

 

 

tussi

Adjectives whose nominative ends in is or or, make e in the neuter, and put the ablative only in i, as

 

fortis

 

 

 

Forti

 

mollis

 

ablative

 

Molli

 

dulcis

 

 

 

dulci

thus

 

acer

 

 

 

 

 

acris

 

ablative

 

acri

 

acre

 

 

 

 

Although poets are sometimes allowed to use e instead of i in their verses.

Other adjectives end both in e and in i, as

 

capax

 

ablative

 

capace

 

or ci

 

duplex

 

 

 

duplice

 

 

 

pauper

 

sospes

except

 

degener

 

hospes

 

 

uber

which make the ablative only in e

{n. p.}

Comparatives also make the ablative in two ways, as

Melior

 

ablative

 

meliore

 

or ri

Doctior

 

 

 

doctiore

 

 

And similarly some substantives, as

 

Ignis

 

 

 

igne

 

 

 

amnis

 

 

 

amne

 

 

 

anguis

 

 

 

angue

 

 

 

suppellex

 

ablative

 

supellectile

 

or i

 

unguis

 

 

 

ungue

 

 

 

vectis

 

 

 

vecte

 

 

 

However civis rarely makes

ablative in

 

cive or civi.

Arpinas rarely makes

 

 

Arpinate or Arpinati

 

And in similar ways when it comes to other gentiles of this kind. Finally, the following nouns, whose accusative ends in em and im, form the ablative in the same way, as

 

puppis

 

ablative

 

puppe

 

or i

 

navis

 

 

 

nave

 

 

And in similar way, verbal nouns in trix, as

 

victrix

 

ablative

 

victrice

 

or ci

 

altrix

 

 

 

altrice

 

 

Neuter nouns whose ablative singular only ends in i, or in e and i, have the nominative plural in ia, as

 

molli

 

mollia

 

duplice or duplici

 

duplicia. Except

 

Ubera

 

 

 

plura or pluria

 

 

 

aplustra or aplustria. And comparatives, as

 

meliora

 

doctiora

 

fortiora

 

priora

From ablatives which only end in i, or both in e and i, the genitive plural is made in ium, as

 

Utili

 

utilium

 

puppe or puppi

 

puppium.

{n. p.}

Except comparatives, as

 

maiorum

 

 

meliorum. Also except these:

 

 

supplicum

 

Veterum

 

complicum

 

Memorum

 

strigilum

 

Pugilum

 

artificum

 

Inopum

 

vigilum

 

 

But plus forms plurium. There are some nouns which sometimes admit a syncope, these are

 

sapientum

 

instead of

 

Sapientium

 

serpentum

 

 

 

Serpentium

When the nominative singular cases end with two consonants, the plural genitive ends in ium, as

 

pars

 

 

 

partium

 

urbs

 

 

 

urbium

 

falx

 

genitive

 

falcium

 

glans

 

 

 

glandium

 

trabs

 

 

 

trabium

 

merx

 

 

 

mercium

Except

 

hyemum

 

 

 

forcipum

 

principum

 

 

 

inopum

 

participum

 

 

 

caelibum

 

munificum

 

 

 

 

When there is an equal number of syllables in the nominative and genitive singular, the genitive plural ends in ium, as

 

collis

 

 

 

Collium

 

mensis

 

is

genitive

 

Mensium

 

auris

 

 

 

aurium

You can add these

 

litium

 

 

 

salium

 

ditium

 

 

 

manium

 

vitium

 

 

 

penatium

Nevertheless, these ones make an exception {n. p.}

 

canum

 

 

 

iuvenum

 

 

panum

 

 

 

Opum

 

 

vatum

 

 

 

apum

According to these

 

 

as, makes assium

 

os, ossium

 

mas, marium

 

faux, faucium

 

vas, vadium

 

mus, murium

 

nox, noctium

 

caro, cranium

 

nix, nivium

 

cor, cordium

Alituum from ales obtains u. Boum is anomalous, and also bobus or bubus.

Nouns whose genitive plural ends in ium, form the accusative by means of es and with the diphthong eis, as

 

partium

 

 

partes

 

or eis

 

omnium

 

 

omnes

 

 

And the most part of Greek nouns, when they are declined following the fashion of their tongue, they form the genitive in os, as

 

Titan

 

 

 

Titanos

 

Pan

 

genitive

 

Panos

 

Daphnis

 

 

 

Daphnidos

 

Phyllis

 

 

 

Phyllidos

However, the dative ends in a short i, as

 

Titani

 

Daphnidi

 

Pani

 

Phyllidi

The accusative ends in a, except they be of the neuter gender, as

 

Pana

 

Amaryllida

 

Phyllida

 

Orphea

Nevertheless, nouns ending in is and ys, which are declined in the genitive with a pure os, make the accusative by changing the s of the nominative into an n, as

 

Tethys, Tethyos

 

 

 

Tethyn

 

Decapolis, Decapolhos

 

accusative

 

Decapolin

 

Denesis, Denesios

 

 

 

Genesin

 

Metamorphosis, Metamorphosios

 

 

 

Metamorphosin

There are also nouns which end so much in m and n as in a, as {n. p.}

 

 

Paris

 

accusative

 

Parin

 

and

 

Parida

 

 

Themis

 

 

 

Themin

 

 

 

Themida

from genitives

 

Parios and Paridos

 

 

 

Themyos and Themydos

 

Feminine nouns in o make the genitive in us, and the accusative in o, as

 

Sappho, Sapphus

 

 

 

Sappho

 

 

Manto, Mantus

 

these

 

Manto

 

Clio, Clius

 

 

 

Clio

 

The vocative is mostly similar to the nominative, yet in some nouns the s is removed from the nominative

 

Pallas, Pallantis

 

 

Palla

 

Theseus, Theseos

 

 

Theseu

 

Phyllis, Phyllidos

 

 

Phylli

 

Tethys, Tethyos

 

 

Tethy

 

Alexis, Alexios

 

 

Alexi

 

Achilles, Achilleos

 

 

Achille

Neuter singular nouns in a are Greek, as problema, poema, which the ancients also declined according to the Latin manner by adding the syllable tum, as hoc problematum, hoc poematum. Their dative and ablative plurals are still used more frequently, as problematis, poematis.

 

Fourth declension

There is almost nothing difficult in the fourth declension, for it has only two terminations for the nominative singular, namely

 

us

 

as

 

manus

 

u

 

 

 

genu

The u is only for the neuter, but in the singular it applies to all cases.

The ancients from the nominative {F}

 

anus

 

 

 

anuis

 

 

 

tumultus

 

said

 

tumulti

 

in the genitive

 

ornatus

 

 

 

ornati

 

 

Terence, eius anuis causa. Idem, Nihil ornati, nihil tumulti.

The dative has ui, and sometimes also u, as

 

fructui

 

rarer

 

fructu

 

concubitui

 

 

 

concubitu

 

Vergil, quod neque concubitu indulgent.

But currûm instead of curruum is a synaeresis, as it usually happens in other declensions. Iesus has Iesum in the accusative, while in the other cases is always Iesu. These nouns form the dative and ablative plural in ubus, as

 

acus

 

 

specus

 

lacus

 

 

quereus

 

artus

ubus

 

partus

ubus

 

acus

 

 

portus

 

tribus

 

 

veru

 

ficus

 

 

 

All the other nouns in ibus, as

 

fructibus

 

manibus

 

fetibus

 

motibus

 

Fifth Declension

The fifth declension has few genitives, datives, and ablatives plural, as it will be explained more extensively below among heteroclite nouns.

Formerly, some nouns of the third inflexion were declined according to this declension, as plebes, plebei.

Formerly, the genitive of this declension ended in es, ii, and e.

Cicero, equites vero daturos illius dies poenas.

Vergil, munera laetitiamque dii.

Sallust, vix decima parte die reliqua. {n. p.}

You have to carefully observe all the other nouns besides the ones that we have already mentioned, and which are called heteroclites by the grammarians. You will be able to learn some of these nouns from what the various recommended authors have written, and other nouns from the following rules.

 

Of Heteroclite Nouns

Nouns which vary in gender or inflection, all those that lack a predominant new form, are heteroclites.

 

Variances

 

You distinguish this variance of genders and mostly of the inflections:

Pergamus the unhappy city of the Trojans, gives birth to Pergama

Which, if it did not lack the plural, makes an architectural element of itself.

Singulars are feminine, neuters rejoice plurals.

 

The singular number gives to these nouns neuter gender, the plural both masculine and neuter,

Rastrum with freno, filum and likewise capistrum.

Similarly Argos and caelum are neuter singular, but pay attention,

You will call caelos and Argos only masculine.

But frena and frenos, following whose rule also others are declined.

 

Nundinum, and also epulum, to which you will add balneum, and these

Are actually neuter in the singular, in the plural they are feminine according to custom.

For Juvenal it is correct to have the plural Balnea.

 

These nouns are masculine in the singular, neuter in the plural.

Maenalus, and the sacred mountain Dindimus, Ismarus and

Tartara, Taygetus, ans so Taenera, Massica, and the high

Gargarus. But the number will imply both genders for these nouns:

Sibilus and iocus, locus, and Campanus Avernus.

 

Defectives

The remaining nouns which follow lack number or case {F. ii.}

 

Aptotes

Nouns whose case does not vary, as fas, nil, nihil, instar,

Many nouns in u, or likewise in i, as are both cornu and genu.

So are gummi, frugi, thus tempe, tot, quot, and you will call aptote all the

Numbers from three to a hundred.

 

Monoptotes

A monoptote is a noun which has only one case,

As noctu, natu, iussu, iniussu, likewise astu,

Promptu, permissu. We read astus in the plural.

We read inficias: it is found only in that case.

 

Diptotes

Diptotes are those nouns for which only two inflections remain,

As fors will make forte in the sixth case, and spontis sponte.

Likewise, plus has pluris, repetundarum repetundis.

And iugeris makes iugere in the sixth case. Also verbis

Verbere. And suppetiae makes suppetias in the fourth case.

Tantumdem makes tantidem. Likewise, impetis makes impete

In this last case. Add vicem with vice in the sixth case, I will say no more.

Verberis and vicem, and so plus with iungere:

These four preserved all cases in the second case.

 

Triptotes

Nouns which are inflected in three cases are called triptote,

As precis and precem, and I will propitiate prece as pleasant.

Thus, opis is what we say, take opem according to the rules, and ope is more suitable.

But only the nominative of frugis and of ditionis is missing.

Vis is a complete word, except if by chance it needs a dative.

In each of these nouns, the singular is mutilated, the plural is complete.

 

Words which relate, as qui, which inquire, as ecquis,

And which distribute, as nullus, neuter, and omnis,

Usually join indefinites to these, as quilibet, alter.

They often lack the fifth case and pronouns, except {n. p.}

The following four: noster, nostras, meus and tu.

You can observe that all proper nouns whose nature is limiting,

Will not be in the plural, as Mars, Cato, Gallia, Roma,

Ida, Tagus, Lelaps, Pernasus, and Bucephalus.

You can add to these cereals, herbs, moistures, metals.

You can seek yourself what authors think of these words.

Sometimes these words maintain the plural, sometimes they refuse to.

 

Ordea, farra, forum, mel, mulsum, defruta, and thus,

Only preserve three similar plural voices.

 

But these words hesperus and vesper, pontus, and limus and finimus,

So penus and sanguis, so aether, nemo,

Are masculine and hardly exceeding the singular number.

 

These singular words of the feminine gender are rarely plural:

Pubes and salus, so talio with tussis by nature.

Pix, humus, and lues, sitis and fuga, you can add quietem.

So cholera and fames, and bilis, senecta, iuventus.

However, these words soboles, labes, and also all nouns of the fifth declension

Will often maintain three similar cases of the plural.

Remove res, species, facies, and acies and dies,

All words whose number can also be plural.

Many feminine words usually join to these, as:

Stultitia, invidia, and sapientia, desidia and

And countless words of this kind, presented in the explanation

You have already been given , so that you can follow a common thread.

However, in more rare cases you can add the plural for these words.

 

Nor it is allowed to give the plural to these neuters:

Delicium, senium, letum, and cenum, and salum,

So barathrum, virus, vitrum, and viscum, and penum.

Iustitium, nihilum, ver, vas, gluten, also halec,

You can add genu, solium, iubar. Here you can also put many similar words {n. p.}

Which, if you observe, will occur to you while reading.

 

These masculine words are satisfied only with the plural,

Manes, maiores, cancelli, liberi, and antes,

Menses profluvium, lemures, fasti, and minores,

When genus means natales, you add penates,

And plural places, such as both Gabii, and Locri,

And whatever similar you read anywhere.

 

These nouns are of the feminine gender, and of the plural number:

Exuviae, phalerae, and grates, manubie, and idus,

Antiae, and induciae, likewise both insidiae, and minae,

Excubiae, nonae, nugae, and tricae, and calendae,

Quisquiliae, thermae, cunae, dirae, and exequiae,

Feriae and inferiae, and so primitiae, and plagae

When signifying retia, and valuae, and divitiae,

Nuptiae, and also lactes. Thebae and Athenae must be added,

And you find more names of the places of this kind.

 

These neuter nouns are read in the plural more rarely:

Moenia with tesquis, praecordia, lustra ferarum,

Arma, mapalia, so bellaria, munia, castra.

Funus requires iusta, and virgo requires sponsalia.

Rostra loves disertus, and pueri carry crepundia,

And infantes worship cunabula, augur consults

exta, and releasing superis effata recalls.

Festa deum as Bacchanalia can be added.

If you read more of these nouns, you will be allowed to put them also in this group.

 

Redundances

These nouns almost abound, reproducing different forms.

For instance, they vary gender and voice: tonitrus and tonitru.

So clypeus clypeum, baculus baculum and bacillum. {n. p.}

Sensus and this sensum, tignus and tignum. Tapetum,

And tapete tapes, punctus and punctum, sinapi

Which, by changing gender, is considered to be a scelerata sinapis.

Sinus and this sinum vas lactis, and menda mendum.

Viscus and this viscum, so cornu and flexile cornum,

But Lucan says, cornus tibi cura sinistri.

Eventus also eventum. But why do I devote attention to these?

You could find thousands of similar words in the writings of the learned.

But you should note some further Greek nouns,

Which have brought forth from the accusative case a new Latin word

For panther makes panthera, and cratera crater,

Cassis has cassida, but also aether makes aethera,

Hence comes cratera, comes aethera, thus caput ipsum

Is covered by cassida magna, and panthera will be tamed.

 

Here the nominative case is changed , the meaning and the same gender remain.

Gibbus and this gibber, cucumis cucumer, stipis and stips.

Thus cinis and ciner, vomis vomer, scobis and scobs.

Pulvis also pulver, pubis puber. To which you can add

Nouns ending in or and os, honor, and labor, arbor, and odor,

And this apes and apis, plebs plebes. There are many words

Taken from the Greeks that take a double form,

As delphin delphinus, and this elephas elephantus.

So congrus conger, meleagrus thus meleager,

Teucrus also Teucer. You will add here many other words

Which fair thinking and diligent readings will provide you with.

 

These words are at the same time of the fourth and of the second declensions.

Laurus indeed makes lauri and laurus in the genitive.

So quercus, pinus, ficus, both for fruit and tree.

This colus and penus, cornus, when a tree is considered.

So lacus, and domus, although this is not to be found in every case.

You also read plural forms for these, which you rightfully leave to the ancients. {n. p.}

And there are many adjectives that abound to be noted,

But first of all, many of these nouns and more expand your knowledge:

Arma, iugum, neruvus, somnus, and clivus, and animus,

And how much limus is there, how many frenum, and cera, bacillum,

From which you can form both us and is, as inermus inermis.

But hilarus is rarer: hilaris is the well-known word.

 

Of the Comparison of Nouns

Those nouns whose significance you can increase or decrease are compared.

There are three degrees of comparison

The positive, which means a thing without excess, as

 

albus

 

probus

 

niger

 

improbus

The comparative, whose positive meaning increases by means of the adverb magis, as

 

albior

 

that is

 

magis albus

 

probior

 

 

 

magis probus

It also regularly happens that the syllable or is added to the nominative case ending in i, as

from

 

amici

 

is made

 

amicior

 

 

pudici

 

 

 

pudicior

The superlative, which means more than the positive with the adverb valde, as

 

doctissimus

 

that is

 

valde doctus

 

iustissimus

 

 

 

valde iustus

It also regularly happens that s and simus are added to the nominative case ending in i, as

from

 

candidi

 

is made

 

candidissimus

 

 

prudenti

 

 

 

prudentissimus

However, the words ending in r form the superlative by adding rimus, as {n. p.}

 

pulcher

 

pulcherrimus

 

 

niger

 

nigerrimus

 

 

 

 

dextimus

from

 

dexter

exceptions are

maturrimus or

from the ancient

 

maturissimus

matur

These six words in lis form the superlative in limus, that is

 

facilis

 

facillimus

 

docilis

 

docillimus

 

agilis

 

agillimus

 

gracilis

 

gracillimus

 

humilis

 

humillimus

 

similis

 

simillimus

Nouns which are drawn from

 

dico

 

volo

 

loquor

 

facio

are compared in this manner,

maledicus

 

 

magniloquus

 

 

maledicentior

 

from dico

magniloquentior

 

from loquor

maledicentissimus

 

 

magniloquentissimus

 

 

benevolus

 

 

magnificus

 

 

benevolentior

 

from volo

magnificentior

 

from facio

benevolentissimus

 

 

magnificentissimus

 

 

If a vowel precedes the final us, the comparison should be made by means of the adverbs magis and maxime, as

 

idoneus

 

arduus

 

magis idoneus

 

magis arduus

 

maxime idoneus

 

maxime arduus

At the same time, we must be very careful that words that occur rarely while reading the authors are used just as rarely. The following words are of this kind

 

assiduior

 

egregiissimus

 

strenuior

 

mirificissimus

 

pientissimus or

 

ipsissimus

{G}

 

piissimus

 

exiguissimus for Ovid

 

perpetuissimus

 

multissimus for Cicero

 

Anomalous comparison

 

bonus

 

malus

 

magnus

 

parvus

 

melior

 

peior

 

maior

 

minor

 

optimus

 

pessimus

 

maximus

 

minimus

 

 

multus, plurimus

 

vetus

 

deterior

 

multa, plurima

 

veterior

 

deterrimus

 

multum, plus, plurimum

 

veterrimus

 

from the ancient deter

 

 

nequam

 

citra

 

intra

 

infra

 

nequior

 

citerior

 

interior

 

inferior

 

nequissimus

 

citimus

 

intimus

 

infimus

 

 

extra

 

supra

 

post

 

ultra

 

exterior

 

superior

 

posterior

 

ulterior

 

extimus or

 

supremus

 

postremus

 

ultimus

 

extremus

 

or summus

 

 

 

 

 

 

prope

 

pridem

 

diu

 

saepe

 

propior

 

prior

 

diutior

 

saepius

 

proximus

 

primus

 

diutissimus

 

saepissime

 

from this proximior

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Defective comparison

 

inclytus

 

meritus

 

opimus

 

sinister

 

inclytissimus

 

meritissimus

 

opimior

 

sinisterior

 

 

ocior

 

novus

 

iuvenis

 

ocissimus

 

novissimus

 

iunior

 

from ὠκύς

 

 

 

 

 

 

adolescens

 

senex

 

potior

 

ante

 

adolescentior

 

senior

 

potissimus

 

anterior

 

 

longinquus

 

nuper

 

pene

 

longinquior

 

nuperrimus

 

penissimus

{n. p.}

Sometimes the comparison is also made from substantives, but incorrectly, as

 

Neronior

 

 

 

Nerone

 

Cynaedior

 

from

 

Cynaedo

 

Punior

 

 

 

Poeno

 

Of Pronouns

A pronoun is a part of speech which we use in showing or repeating a particular thing.

There are fifteen pronouns

 

ego

 

meus

 

tu

 

tuus

 

sui

 

suus

 

ille

 

noster

 

ipse

 

vester

 

iste

 

nostras

 

hic

 

vestras

 

is

 

 

To which we can also add compounds of these pronouns, as

 

egomet

 

ut etiam

 

tute

 

qui

 

idem

 

quae

 

and similar

 

quod

 

Of the Variations of Pronouns

Pronouns vary in

 

type

 

declension

 

number

 

person

 

case

 

figure

 

gender

 

 

 

Of the Type of Pronouns

There are two types of pronouns {G. ii.}

 

primitive

 

derivative

These belong to the primitive pronouns

 

ego

 

ille

 

hic

 

tu

 

ipse

 

is

 

sui

 

iste

 

 

Other pronouns among the primitives are

 

demonstratives, or

 

relatives

The same pronouns that are called primitive are actually also called demonstrative

 

ego

 

ille

 

hic

 

tu

 

ipse

 

is

 

sui

 

iste

 

 

Instead, the relatives are

 

ille

 

hic

 

idem

 

ipse

 

is

 

qui

Derivatives are

 

meus

 

noster

 

nostras

 

tuus

 

vester

 

vestras

 

suus

 

 

 

 

Different derivatives are

 

possessives, or

 

 

 

 

gentiles

 

 

 

 

 

 

meus

 

noster

possessives are

tuus

vester

 

suus

 

The pronouns that indicate the people and nation, or regions and doctrines are called gentiles, as

 

nostras

 

and cuias

 

vestras

 

for a noun

 

On Number

Pronouns have two numbers {n. p.}

 

singular

 

as

 

Ego

 

plural

 

 

 

Nos

 

Of Case

On the other hand, there are six cases, just like for nouns.

All pronouns lack the vocative, except these four

 

tu

 

noster

 

meus

 

nostras

 

Of Gender

Pronouns have genders just like the adjectives of nouns. So, they have three possible genders.

 

Of Declension

The are four declensions of pronouns. The genitive of the first declension ends in i, as

 

ego

genitive

 

mei

 

and sui, which lacks the nominative

 

tu

 

 

tui

 

in both numbers,

The genitive of the second declension ends in iüs or ius, and their forms are

 

ille

 

 

illius

 

ipse

 

 

ipsius

 

iste

genitive

 

istius

 

hic

 

 

huius

 

is

 

 

eius

 

qui

 

 

cuius

The genitive of the third declension ends in i, ae, i, and their result is

 

meus, mea, meum

 

 

mei, meae, mei

 

tuus, tua, tuum

 

 

tui, tuae, tui

 

suus, sua, suum

genitive

 

sui, suae, sui

 

noster, nostra, nostrum

 

 

nostri, nostrae, nostri

 

vester, vestra, vestrum

 

 

vestri, vestrae, vestri

The genitive of the fourth declension makes atis and follows this order {G. iii.}

 

nostras

 

 

nostratis

 

vestras

genitive

 

vestratis

 

cuias

 

 

cuiatis

 

Of Person

There are three persons of the pronouns

 

first

 

 

 

ego

 

second

 

as

 

tu

 

third

 

 

 

ille

 

Of Figure

There are two figures

 

simple

 

as

 

ego

 

compound

 

 

 

egomet

Pronouns are compounded together, as

 

 

egoipse

 

suiipsius

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tuipse

 

meiipsius

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

istic

 

 

istunc

 

 

istoc

nominative

 

istaec

accusative

 

istanc

ablative

 

istac

 

 

istoc or

 

 

istoc or

 

 

istoc

 

 

istuc

 

 

istuc

 

 

 

plural

 

nominative and

 

 

illic

 

 

 

 

 

accusative

istaec. Thus

 

illaec

 

is declined

 

and are also compounded with nouns, as

 

illoc

 

 

 

 

 

cuiusmodi

 

 

istiusmodi

 

 

 

 

 

huiusmodi

 

 

illiusmodi

 

 

 

And compounded with prepositions, as

 

mecum

 

nobiscum

 

quicum

 

tecum

 

vobiscum

 

quibuscum

 

secum

 

 

 

 

And likewise compounded with adverbs, as

 

eccum

 

 

 

ellum

 

 

 

eccam

 

from ecce

 

ellam

 

from ecce

 

eccos

 

 

 

ellos

 

and the same from

 

eccas

 

 

 

ellas

 

is and demum

{n. p.}

They are also compounded with conjunctions, as

 

 

hiccine

 

 

hunccine

 

 

hoccine

nominative

 

haeccine

accusative

 

hanccine

ablative

 

haccine

 

 

hoccine

 

 

hoccine

 

 

hoccine

Haeccine is the neuter plural.

Finally, pronouns are compounded with syllabic additions, as

 

met

 

ce

 

te

 

pte

Met is added to the first and second persons, as

 

egomet

 

mihimet

 

meimet

 

memet

On the contrary, we do not say tumet in the nominative, so that it is not believed to be a verb from tumeo, as

 

 

tuimet

 

temet

 

 

 

 

tibimet

 

vosmet etc.

 

 

Te is added to these

 

tu

as

tute

 

 

and te

 

tete

Ce is added to the inflected forms of these pronouns

 

hic

 

 

 

ille

 

 

 

iste, these often end in s, as

 

huiusce

 

Hosce

 

illiusce

 

Illosce

 

istiusce

 

Istosce

Pte is put after ablatives

 

mea

 

 

meapte

 

tua

 

 

tuapte

 

sua

as

 

suapte

 

nostra

 

 

nostrapte

 

vestra

 

 

vestrapte

Sometimes it is added to masculine and neuter nouns, as

 

meopte Marte

 

suopte iumento

 

tuopte labore

 

nostropte damno etc.

{n. p.}

Quis and qui are compounded in this manner.

Quis is put after these particles in compounds

 

en

 

 

ecquis

 

ne

 

 

nequis

 

alius

as

 

aliquis

 

num

 

 

nunquis

 

si

 

 

siquis

And they both in the feminine singular and in the neuter plural

have qua, not quae

as

 

siqua mulier

 

 

nequa flagitia etc.

Quis also is put after these particles in compounds

 

nam

 

 

quisnam

 

piam

 

 

quispiam

 

putas

as

 

quisputas

 

quam

 

 

quisquam

 

que

 

 

quisque

And they have quae and not qua anywhere except in the ablative singular

 

as

 

quaenam doctrina

 

 

negotia quaepiam

Quis is also compounded with itself, as quisquis, which varies in this way

nominative

 

quisquis

accusative

 

quicquid

ablative

 

quoquo

 

 

quicquid

 

 

 

 

quaqua

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

quoquo

Qui in compounds is put before these particles

 

dam

 

 

 

quidam

 

vis

 

 

 

quivis

 

libet

 

as

 

quilibet

 

cumque

 

 

 

quicumque

And these, anywhere except in the ablative singular

maintain quae, not qua

as

 

quaedam puella

 

 

quaecumque facinora

{n. p.}

 

Of Verbs

A verb is a part of speech which is inflected according to modes and tenses, and it means being, or doing, or going through something

as

sum

 

moveo

 

moveor

First of all, verbs are divided into

 

personal

 

as

 

doceo

 

impersonal

 

 

 

oportet

A personal verb what we distinguish through the persons, as

 

ego lego

 

hic legit

 

tu legis

 

illi legunt

On the contrary, a verb which is not distinguished through persons is called impersonal, as

 

poenitet

 

miseret

 

taedet

 

oportet

 

Of the Variations of Verbs

These are the things that vary in verbs

 

form

 

type

 

mood

 

person

 

tense

 

number

 

figure

 

conjugation

Of Form

 

 

 

active

 

deponent

There are five forms of verbs

passive

common

 

neuter

 

Active

An active verb ends in o and can form the passive with or, as {H}

 

doceo

 

doceor

 

lego

 

legor

Passive

A passive verb ends in or and it can resume the active form by removing r, as

 

amor

 

amo

 

afficior

 

afficio

Neuter

A neuter verb ends in o or m. It cannot properly take neither the active nor the passive forms, as

 

curro

 

iaceo

 

ambulo

 

sum

There are three kinds of neuter verbs, because they are sometimes called substantival, as

 

sum

 

est

 

es

 

sumus etc.

Another kind of neuter verbs is called absolute: it carries the meaning itself. Moreover, on the contrary, it is double, for in the same verb another one expresses a complete action, as

 

ambulo

 

pluit

 

dormio

 

ningit

Another one actually means a complete passion in itself , as

 

palleo

 

albesco

 

rubeo

 

nigresco

And in addition, the neuter verb is different when it moves to an action with a similar meaning, and also uses the third person of the passive voice, as

 

bibo vinum

 

vinum bibitur

 

curro stadium

 

stadium curritur

 

vivo vitam

 

vita vivitur

And finally, there are verbs that are both simple and neuter {n. p.} and are actually active compounds, as

 

eo

 

adeo

 

venio

 

advenio

 

mingo

 

commingo

 

Deponent

Deponent verbs, which end in or, have either the meaning of the active, as loquor, or that of the neuter, as philosophor.

 

Common

Common verbs, which end in or, obtain both an active and passive meaning, as

 

veneror

 

osculor

 

interpreter

 

criminor

 

adulor

 

amplector

 

consolor

 

frustror

 

meditor

 

stipulor

 

dignor

 

experior

 

speculor

 

testor

 

ementior

And many others of this kind which you would find everywhere in the ancients.

 

Of Mood

We can count six modes of verbs.

The indicative, which simply defines anything that happens or does not happen, as probitas laudatur et alget. This mood is used sometimes to ask, sometimes to doubt, as quis leget haec? An in astu venit aliud ex alio malum?

The imperative, which we use to give orders. This mood does not have the future tense, but a double present, as according to Propertius, aut si es dura, nega: sin es non dura, venito.

Vergil, 

Tityre dum redeo, brevis est via, pasce capellas,

et potum pastas age Tityre, et inter agendum {H. ii.}

occursare capro (cornu ferit ille) caveto.

On the other hand, the past tense is taken from the subjunctive.

Cicero, sed amabo te, nihil incommodo valetudinis tuae feceris.

Martial, dic quotus es, quanti cupias cenare, nec ullum addideris verbum: cena parata tibi est.

 

 

 

 

praeceptum sit

And indeed the passive voices

dictum sit

 

determinatum sit

Priscian acknowledged that there are past imperatives. This mood is also called permissive, because sometimes a permission is signified by it, as for Vergil, si sine pace tua, atque invito numine Troes Italiam petiere, luant peccata, nec illos iuveris auxilio.

Finally, it is sometimes called also hypothetical and hortative, as eamus, et in media arma ruamus.

The optative, by which we wish for something to happen, and it does not matter if something did not took place, or takes place, or it is going to take place, as utinam bonis literis, suus detur honos.

The optative, potential, and subjunctive moods are believed to have five different tenses in the same voices, as the author Linacre says.

Moreover, we must notice that the present of this mood sometimes acquires the meaning of the future, as utinam aliquando tecum loquar.

The potential mood, by which we refer to something that can, wants to, or must happen, as expectes eadem a summo minimoque poeta, instead of potes expectare. Non expectes, ut statim gratia agat, qui satiatur invitus, instead of non debes expectare.

Quis enim rem tam veterem, pro certo affirmet? Pro vult affirmare? {n. p.}

The Greeks express this mood either with the indicative, or with the optative and the particle ἄν.

The subjunctive, which does not complete a sentence by itself, unless it comes together with another utterance, as

Si fueris felix, multos numerabilis amicos,

Tempora si fuerint nubila, solus eris.

The infinitive, which means both to do or to undergo an action, and it has no precise difference in number or person, as malim probus esse, quam haberi.

 

Of Tense

There are five tenses.

The present, by which an action taking place now is expressed , as scribo.

The imperfect, by which something that someone has previously done is expressed, and that the action is not yet complete.

Vergil, hic templum Iunoni ingens, Sydonia Dido condebat.

That is to say, it was under construction in that moment.

The perfect, by which a past and finished action is expressed. It is double in the passive, deponent and common moods, and it is explained by this in a double circumlocution. One, by which the most recent past is expressed, as pransus sum. The other, by which a more distant past is indicated, as pransus fui. You will actually properly say pransus fui and not pransus sis.

The pluperfect, by which an action that is already past in the past is expressed.

The future, by which a thing that is to be done in the future is expressed. Some people call it the promising mood, because it seems to promise or desire for something to be done.

Ovid, ibimus o Nymphae, monstrataque saxa petemus.

This mood also has another gender, which is called ‘exact’ or perfect, as videro, abiero.

Terence, si te aequo animo ferre accipiet, negligentem {H. iii.} feceris.

This perfect future is actually also found in the subjunctive mood.

Pliny, ero securior dum legam, statimque timebo, quum legero.

 

Of Figure

There are two figures

 

simple

as

facio

 

compound

 

calefacio

 

Compound verbs whose simple figures have become obsolete are

 

defendo

 

aspicio

 

experior

 

offendo

 

conspicio etc.

 

comperior

 

 

expedio

 

deleo

 

compello

 

incendo

 

impedio

 

imbuo

 

appello

 

accendo

 

 

ingruo

 

infligo

 

impleo

 

and others of this kind

 

congruo

 

instigo

 

compleo

 

 

And also those that seem to come from the Greeks, as

 

impleo from πλῶ

 

procello from ϰελλω

 

Of Type

There are two types of verbs.

The primitive, which is the original form of the verb, as ferveo.

The derivative, when the verb is derived from the primitive, as fervesco.

There are five kinds of derivatives.

Inchoative derivatives – which Valla calls meditativa and augmentativa, i.e. verbs expressing either a meditative or a growing state– end in sco, as labasco, calesco, ingemisco, edormisco.

They mean either to begin, as lucescit – that is incipit lucere – or at least to develop and to be brought forward, as in Vergil, explere mentem nequit, ardescitque tuendo.

Most of them are used instead of the main themes, as timesco, hisco, conticesco that is timeo, hio, taceo.

Frequentative verbs end in to, so, xo, or tor, as {n. p.}

 

visito

 

pulso

 

nexo

 

sector

 

 

affecto

 

viso

 

texo

 

scitor

 

 

scriptito

 

quasso

 

vexo

 

sciscitor

 

They mean either some repetition or an intention, as dicito, that is dico frequenter, I say frequently; or viso that is eo ad videndum, I am going to see.

This group also includes verbs like vellico, fodico, albico, and others of this kind, which grammarians usually also call apparativa, i.e., verbs expressing a preparation.

Optative verbs end in rio, as lecturio, parturio, esurio, cenaturio. These verbs add to the meaning of its primitives some sort of eagerness or desire.

Diminutives end in lo or sso, as sorbillo, cantillo, pitisso, which mean sorbeo, canto, bibo in a smaller and moderate way.

Imitative verbs express an imitation, as patrisso, atticisso, platonisso. But Latins did not particularly like this form, as they used graecor instead of graecisso, like cornicor from cornice, vulpinor from vulpe, Bacchor from Baccho.

 

Of Person

 

 

first

 

lego

There are three persons for verbs

second

as

legis

 

third

 

legit

 

Of Number

There are also two numbers

 

singular

as

 

lego

 

plural

 

 

legimus

 

Of Conjugation

Since the rudiments of English explain how to conjugate verbs, a lesson which pupils must know properly and thoroughly, I will now discuss this, so that these extremely clear and highly useful rules on past and supine tenses by William Lily may be eagerly assimilated. {n. p.}

 

Of the Past Tenses of Simple Verbs

First Conjugation

The present in as makes the perfect tense in avi,

As no, nas, navi; vocito, vocitas, vocitavi,

Eliminate lavo, lavi; iuvo, iuvi, and nexo, nexui.

And seco, which makes secui, neco, which makes necui, the verb mico

Which makes micui, plico which makes plicui, frico which gives fricui

So domo, which makes domui, tono which makes tonui, the verb sono,

which makes sonui, crepo, which makes crepui, veto which gives vetui.

And cubo, cubui. These verbs are rarely formed in avi.

Do das usually makes dedi, sto stas needs to form steti.

 

Second Conjugation

The present in es makes the perfect tense in vi,

As nigreo, nigres, nigrui; iubeo except iussi.

Sorbeo has sorbui, also sorpsi. Mulceo, mulsi.

Luceo will have luxi; sedeo, sedi, and video

Will have vidi, but prandeo, prandi; strideo, stridi.

The first syllable is repeated in the following four verbs.

So pendeo has pependi, and mordeo has momordi,

Spondeo has spopondi, and tondeo has totondi,

Suadeo, suasi; rideo, risi, and ardeo has arsi.

If l or r is put before geo, geo is turned in si,

Urgeo to ursi, mulgeo gives mulsi and also mulxi.

Frigeo, frixi; lugeo, luxi; and augeo has auxi.

Fleo, fles gives flevi; leo, les gives levi, and thence comes

Deleo, delevi; pleo, ples, plevi; neo, nevi.

From maneo is formed mansi; torqueo, torsi;

Haereo will have haesi. Veo is made vi, as ferveo, fervi. {n. p.}

Niveo, and conniveo thence demand nivi

and nixi. Add these cieo, civi, and vieo, vievi.

 

Third Conjugation

The third conjugation will form the past tense as shown here.

Bo becomes bi, as lambo, lambi. Except scribo, scripsi.

And nubo, nupsi, the old cumbo gives cubui.

Co becomes ci, as vinco, vici; parco will have peperci

And parsi. Dico, dixi; duco also duxi.

Do becomes di, as mando, mandi. But scindo gives scidi.

Findo, fidi; fando, fudi, and tundo, tutudi,

Pendo, pependi; tendo, tetendi; pedo, pepedi.

Add cado, cecidi and instead of verbero, cedo, cecidi.

Cedo for discedere, or it is the case, cessi.

Vado, rado, laedo, ludo, divido, trudo,

Claudo, plaudo, rodo, from do always make si.

Go becomes xi, as iungo, iunxi. Bur r before go makes si.

As spargo, sparsi; lego, legi, and ago makes egi.

Say tango, tetigi; pungo, punxi and pupugi.

Frango gives fregi, when pango means pacisci,

It has pepigi; iungo for pegi, panxi for cano.

Ho becomes xi, as traho teaches traxi, and veho, vexi.

Lo becomes ui, as colo, colui. Except psallo with p,

And sallo without p, for both form salli.

Vello gives velli, vulsi and also fallo, fefelli.

Cello for frango, ceculi, and pello, pepuli.

Mo becomes ui, as vomo, vomui. But emo makes emi.

Como asks for compsi; promo, prompsi. You can add demo,

Which forms dempsi; sumo, sumpsi; premo, pressi.

No becomes vi, as sino, sivi. Except temno, tempsi.

Sterno gives stravi; sperno, sprevi; lino, levi,

sometimes lini and livi. And also cerno, crevi. {I}

Gigno, pono, cano give genui, posui, cecini.

Po becomes psi, as scalpo, scalpsi. Except rumpo, rupi.

And strepo, which forms strepui, crepo which gives crepui.

Quo becomes qui, as linquo, liqui: except coquo, coxi.

Ro becomes vi, as sero, when it means planto and semino, becomes sevi,

Because servi is better, but changes the meaning.

Verro has verri and versi; uro, ussi; gero, gessi;

Quaero, quaesivi; tero, trivi; curro, cucurri.

So just as accerso, arcesso, incesso, and lacesso

Will form sivi. But except capesso, capessi,

Which makes capessivi, and facesso, facessi.

So viso, visi, but pinso will have pinsui.

Sco becomes vi, as pasco, pavi; posco will have poposci.

Disco has didici, quinisco forms quexi.

To becomes ti, as verto, verti. But it can be observed that sisto,

When it means facio, remains active and rightly gives stiti.

Sterto has stertui; meto, messui. From ecto is made exi,

As flecto, flexi; pecto gives pexui and has

Pexi. Necto gives also nexui, and also has nexi.

Mitto gives misi; peto, petii or petivi.

Vo becomes vi, as volvo, volvi; except vivo, vixi.

Just like nexo has nexui, so texo has texui:

Cio becomes ci, as facio, feci, and iacio, ieci;

The ancient lacio, lexi; and specio, spexi.

Dio becomes di, as fodio, fodi; so gio, as fugio, fugi.

Pio becomes pi, as capio, caepi, except cupio, cupivi.

And rapio, rapui; sapio, sapui and sapivi.

Rio becomes ri, as pario, peperi; tio and ssi repeat the s,

As quatio, quassi, which is scarcely found in use.

Finally, uo becomes ui, as statuo, statui; pluo forms pluvi

Or plui. But struo, struxi; fluo, fluxi. {n. p.}

 

Fourth Conjugation

The fourth conjugation gives is, ivi, as shown by scio, scis, scivi.

Except venio giving veni; cambio, campsi;

Raucio, rausi; farcio, farsi; sarcio, sarsi;

Sepio, sepsi; sentio, sensi; fulcio fulsi;

Haurio also hausi; sancio, sanxi; vincio, vinxi.

For salto, salio, salui, and amicio gives amicui.

We rarely use cambivi, haurivi, amicivi,

Sepivi, sancivi, sarcivi, and salivi.

 

Of the Past of Compound Verbs

Simple and compound verbs have the same past tense,

As shown by docui and edocui. But the syllable which

Always doubles in the simple form, is not doubled in the compound.

Except in these three, praecurro, excurro, repungo,

And in verbs rightfully created from do, disco, sto, posco.

Verbs compounded from plico with sub, or a noun as these

Supplico, multiplico, usually form plicavi.

Applico, complico, replico, and explico, end in vi or in avi.

Although oleo in the simple form has olui, any verb

Compounded from it will form olevi.

But redolet and subolet follow the simple form.

All compounds from pungo will form punxi.

Sometimes repungo, repunxi will have pupugi.

Verbs coming from do, when it is of the third conjugation, as addo,

Credo, edo, dedo, reddo, perdo, abdo or obdo.

Condo, indo, trado, prodo, vendo, make didi. Except one:

Abscondo, abscondi. Verbs coming from sto will have stas, stiti.

Verb changing the first vowel in e.

These simple verbs of the present or past tense, {I. ii.}

When in compound form, change the first vowel in e.

Damno, lacto, sacro, fallo, arceo, tracto, fatiscor.

Parcio, carpo, patro, scando, spargo, and pario,

The two verbs born of which, comperit and reperit, make peri.

But the others make ui, as these: aperire, operire.

From pasco pavi, and note that these two,

Compounds, compesco and dipesco, have pescui.

The others, as epasco, will follow the simple rule.

Verbs changing the first vowel in i.

These verbs habeo, lateo, salio, statuo, cado, laedo.

Pango give pegi, cano, quaero, caedo, cecidi.

Tango, egeo, teneo, taceo, sapio, and rapio,

If in compound form, change the first vowel in i,

As rapio, rapui; eripio, eripui. Compounds from cano

Have the past in ui, as concino gives concinui.

So displiceo from placeo, but these two,

Complaceo and perplaceo, follow the simple rule.

The four compounds from pango maintain the a:

Depango, oppango, circumpango, and repango.

From maneo comes mansi, but these four give minui:

Praemineo, emineo, promineo and immineo.

The others will keep the simple form of the verb.

Compounds from scalpo, calco, salto, change the a in u,

As shown by exculpo, inculco, resulto.

Compounds from claudo, quatio, lavo, reject the a,

As shown by claudo, occludo, excludo, and compounds from quatio,

Percutio, excutio, from lavo proluo, diluo.

If you compound these verbs ago, emo, sedeo, rego, frango,

And capio, iacio, lacio, specio, praemo, they always

Change the first vowel of the present in i,

Never of the past, as frango, refringo, refregi.

From capio, incipio, incepi. But you will find only few {n. p.}

On the other hand the simple form is followed for perago and satago.

For dego from ago gives degi; cogo, coegi,

So from rego, pergo, perrexi, also surgo will have

Surrexi, after the middle syllable of the present is removed.

Facto does not change, unless when a preposition is put before.

As shown by olfacio with calfacio, and inficio.

Compounds from lego, if re, se, per, sub, or trans are put before,

Keep the vowel in the present, and change it in i in all other tenses,

Among them, only these intelligo, diligo, negligo,

make lexi in the past tense: all the others legi.

 

Of the Supine of Simple Verbs

Now you will learn how to form the supine from the past tense.

Bi obtains tum, and so bibi becomes bibitum.

Ci becomes ctum, as vici, victum, as witnessed ici

Gives ictum; feci, factum; and ieci, iactum.

Di becomes sum, as vidi, visum; some double the s,

As pandi, passum; sedi, sessum. Add scidi, which

Gives scissum, and fidi, fissum, and fodi, fossum.

Please also note that the first syllable of the supine,

When the paste tense usually doubles it, is not doubled.

As shown by totondi gives tonsum, and cecidi

Which gives caesum, and cecidi which gives casum, and tetendi

Which gives tensum, and tentum, tutudi, tunsum, and pepedi

Which makes peditum; add dedi which rightfully has datum.

Gi becomes ctum, as legi, lectum; pegi and pepigi

Give pactum; fregi, fractum, and tetigi, tactum;

Egi, actum; pupugi; punctum; fugi gives fugitum.

Li becomes sum, as salli, standing for sale condio, salsum.

Pepuli gives pulsum; ceculi, culsum, and fefelli,

Falsum; velli gives vulsum, and so tuli has latum. {I. iii.}

Mi, ni, pi, qui give tum, as shown here:

Emi, emptum; veni, ventum; cecini from cano, cantum.

Cepi from capio gives captum, from coepio, coeptum.

From rumpo, rupi, ruptum; also liqui, lictum.

Ri becomes sum, as verri, versum, except peperi, partum.

Si becomes sum, as visi, visum, but with the doubled s,

Misi will form missum, except fulsi, fultum;

Hausi, haustum; sarsi, sartum; also farsi, fartum;

Ussi, ustum; gessi, gestum; torsi has two supines, tortum

And torsum; also indulsi, which has indultum and indulsum.

Psi becomes ptum, as scripsi, scriptum, except campsi campsum.

Ti becomes tum, sosteti from sto, and sisto makes stiti in the past,

Commonly statum, except verti, versum.

Vi becomes tum, as flavi, flatum, except pavi, pastum.

Lavi gives lotum, sometimes lautum and lavatum.

Potavi, potum, and sometimes also makes potatum.

But favi, fautum; cavi, cautum; from sero, sevi,

Rightly make satum. Levi and livi give litum.

Solvi from solvo, solutum; volvi from volvo, volutum.

Singultivi will have singultum; veneo, venis,

Venivi, venum. Sepelivi rightly sepultum.

A verb that gives vi gives itum, as domui, domitum, except every

Verb in uo, because ui will always form utum,

As exui, exutum, except from ruo is given rui, ruitum.

Secui has sectum; necui, nectum; and fricui,

Frictum; miscui also mixtum; and amicui gives amictum.

Torrui has tostum; docui, doctum; and tenui,

Tentum; consului, consultum; alui, altum and alitum.

So salui, saltum: colui, occului and cultum.

Pinsui has pistum; rapui, raptum; and servi

From sero has sertum, and so texui has textum.

However these change ui in sum, so censeo, censum; {n. p.}

Cellui has celsum; meto has messui and messum;

Likewise nexui, nexum, and so pexui has pexum.

Patui gives passum; carui, cassum and caritum.

Xi becomes ctum, as vinxi, vinctum, and five verbs remove the n:

finxi, fictum; minxi, mictum, and in the supine

Pinxi gives pictum; strinxi and rinxi, rictum.

Flexi, plexi, fixi dant xum, and fluo, fluxum.

 

Of the Supine of Compound Verbs

Every compound supine is formed as the simple one,

Although they do not have the same syllable both.

From the compound tunsum, after the n is removed, comes tusum, from ruitum is made

Rutum, with the middle i removed, and of saltum, sultum.

From sero, which forms satum, the compound give situm.

These supines captum, factum, iactum, raptum change the a into e,

And so do cantum, partum, carptum, sartum and fartum.

A verb compounded from edo does not make estum, but esum,

Apart from one, comedo, which makes both.

From nosco there are only two compounds, cognitum and agnitum;

The others give notum, noscitum is no longer in use.

 

Of the Past Tenses of the Verbs in Or

Verbs in or receive from the ablative of the supine

The past tense by turning u into us, together with sum

or fui, as from lectu, lectus sum or fui. But some of these verbs

Sometimes are to be seen as deponent, and sometimes as common.

For labor gives lapsus, patior gives passus, and those

Born of it, as compatior, compassus, and perpetior

Forms perpessus; fateor which makes fassus and those

Born of it, as confiteor, confessus and diffiteor which

Forms diffessus; gradior gives gressus, and those

Born of it, as digredior, digressus. Add fatiscor,

Fessus sum; mensus sum, metior: uter and usus. {n. p.}

Ordior gives orditus, when it means texo, orsus when it means incoepto.

Nitor, nisus or nixus sum; and ulciscor, ultus.

And so Irascor, iratus; and reor, ratus sum;

Obliviscor has oblitus sum; fruor makes

Fructus or fruitus; add misereri, misertus.

Tuor and tueor do not have tutus, but tuitus sum,

Although both tutum and tuitum are supine.

To loquor add loquutus, and to sequor add sequutus.

Experior becomes expertus; paciscor wants

Pactus sum; nanciscor, nactus; apiscor,

Which is an old verb, aptus sum, from which adipiscor, adeptus.

Add queror, questus; proficiscor. Profectus;

Expergiscor, experrectus sum. And also these: comminiscor,

Commentus; nascor, natus; and morior,

Mortuus; and orior, whose past makes ortus.

 

Of Verbs that Form a Two Past Tenses

These verbs have the past tense of the active and passive voices:

Ceno forms cenavi and cenatus sum;

Iuro, iuravi and iuratus; and poto, potavi

And potus; titubo, titubavi or titubatus.

So careo, carui and cassus sum; prandeo, prandi

And pransus; pateo, patui and passus; and placeo

Gives placui and placitus; suesco, suevi and suetus.

Vaeneo for vendor, vaenivi and venditus sum.

Nubo, nupsi and nupta sum; mereor, meritus sum

Or merui; add libet, libuit and libitum. And add licet,

Which makes licuit and licitum. Taedet which gives taeduit and

Pertaesum. Add pudet, making puduit and puditum;

And piget, which forms piguit and pigitum. {n. p.}

 

Of the Past Tenses of Neuter Passive Verbs

Neuter passive verbs form the past tense in this way:

Gaudeo, gavisus sum; fido, fisus; and audeo

Ausus sum; fio, factus sum; soleo, solitus sum;

Maereo, sum maestus, but Phocae is considered a name.

 

Of Verbs That Borrow the Past Tense

Some verbs take the past tense somewhere else,

Inceptive verbs in sco standing for the primary verb adopt

The past from that verb, therefore tepesco

From tepeo has tepui; fervesco from ferveo, ferui.

Video from cerno has vidi; quatio from concutio

Has the past concussi, and, from percutio, ferio

Has percussi; meio, from mingo, has minxi.

Sido, from sedeo, has sedi; tollo, from suffero,

Sustuli; and from suo, sum fui; and rightly from tulo, fero has tuli;

Sisto, from sto, steti, only for stare; and furo has

Insanivi from a verb of the same meaning.

So, vescor, medeor, liquor and reminiscor borrow

The past tense from pascor, medicor, liquefio, recordor.

 

Of Verbs Without the Past Tense

These verbs avoid the past tense: vergo, ambigo, glisco, fatisco,

Polleo, nideo. In addition to these inceptives, as puerasco,

And passives, whose supine lack the active form,

As metuor, timeor. All contemplatives, i. e. verbs expressing dispositions, except

Parturio, esurio, which keep two past tenses.

 

Of Verbs That Rarely Admit the Supine

These verbs will rarely or never keep the supine: {K}

Lambo, mico, micui, rudo, scabo, parco, peperci,

Dispesco, posco, disco, compesco, quinisco,

Dego, ango, sugo, lingo, mingo, and satago,

Psallo, volo, nolo, malo, tremo, strideo, strido,

Flaveo, liveo, avet, paveo, conniveo, fervet.

Compounds of nuo, as renuo, of cado, as incido, except

Occido, which makes occasum, and recido, recasum.

Respuo, linquo, luo, metuo, cluo, frigeo, caluo,

And sterto, timeo. So luceo and arceo, whose

Compounds have ercitum. So compounds of gruo, as ingruo,

And each neuter verb of the second conjunction formed in ui,

Except oleo, doleo, placeo, and taceo,

Pareo, also careo, noceo, pateo, and lateo,

And valeo, caleo, for these actually have the supine.

 

Of Defective Verbs

But now, in order for you to deal with the verb in its entirety in order,

You will add to these few mutilated and anomalous verbs,

That, at least as because they remain defective, are not suitable for lines,

Which love to proceed with proper and complete feet.

To these verbs what follows, which you distinguish from them, is added as a free expression.

 

Aio

 

 

aio

 

 

 

present indicative

 

ais

 

plural aiunt

 

 

 

ait

 

 

 

 

aiebam

 

 

aiebamus

past imperfect

aiebas

plural

 

aiebatis

 

aiebat

 

 

aiebant

{n. p.}

imperative

ai

 

present optative

 

aias

plural

 

aiamus

potential and subjunctive

 

aiat

 

 

aiant

 

present participle

aiens

 

Ausim

present optative

 

ausim

 

 

 

potential and subjunctive

 

ausis

plural

 

ausint

 

 

ausit

 

 

 

 

Ave

imperative

 

ave

plural

 

avete

 

 

aveto

 

 

avetote

 

Cedo

imperative

cedo

plural

cedite

 

Faxo

 

 

faxo

 

future

 

faxis

for faciam, or fecero. Plural faxint

 

 

faxit

 

 

Forem

imperfect optative

forem

 

essem

potential and subjunctive

fores

for

esses

plural forent

 

foret

 

esset

infinitive

fore

that is

futurum esse

 

 

Quaeso

present indicative

quaeso

plural

quaesumus

 

Infit

Infit is a single voice, meaning dicit or dixit. {K. ii.}

 

Inquio and inquam

 

 

inquo or inquam

 

present indicative

 

inquis

plural inquiunt

 

 

inquit

 

 

past perfect

 

inquisti

 

 

inquit

 

future

 

inquies

 

 

inquiet

 

imperative

 

inque for Terentium

 

 

inquito for Plautum

 

present optative

 

inquiat

potential and subjunctive

 

 

 

participle

inquiens

 

The following verbs

 

odi

 

coepi

 

memini

 

novi

have the complete voices of the past perfect, pluperfect and future of all moods: as for the other moods, they are mostly missing, except for memini, which has memento in the imperative singular and mementote in the plural.

 

Pupils will also notice

 

dor

 

der

 

furo

 

fera

 

for

 

for, simple verbs not to be found.

 

In addition

 

dic

 

dice

 

duc

 

duce

 

fer

 

fere

 

fac

 

face

 

Are voices that are broken by means of apocope.

 

And you will finally observe that {n. p.}

 

eo and

have in the imperfect

 

ibam

in the future

 

ibo

 

queo

 

 

quibam

 

 

quibo

 

Of Impersonal Verbs

What has been said so far about personal verbs, must in turn certainly be said about impersonal verbs, which do not have the nominative of a specific person, but change the nominative of the person must be changed in the other cases, as what we say in English in the personal form – “I must read Vergil” – in Latin is expressed in the impersonal form – as oportet me legere Vergilium.

There are two types of impersonal verbs

active voices

 

passive voices

Impersonal verbs of the active voice are these and other similar to them

 

est

 

accidit

 

vacat

 

iuvat

 

interest

 

contingit

 

prestat

 

constat

 

refert

 

evenit

 

restat

 

conducit

 

placet

 

expedit

 

decet

 

miseret

 

libet

 

liquet

 

oportet

 

piget

 

poenitet

 

licet

 

potest

 

pudet

 

taedet

 

solet

 

 

 

 

Some of these are used in the personal form, as

 

virtus placet probis

 

pecunia omnia potest

 

ars iuvat egentes

 

 

 

oportet

Some verbs, however, always remains impersonal, as

 

pudet

 

 

poenitet

Moreover, they are conjugated in the third person for all moods

 

the past tense of liquet does not exist

 

taedet forms pertaesum est

 

miseret, and miserescit, misertum est

{K. iii.}

These forms are also found in use

 

placitum est

 

 

placet

 

libitum est

 

 

libet

 

puditum est

past tense from

 

pudet

 

licitum est

 

 

licet

 

pigitum est

 

 

piget

Impersonals of the passive voice are made from any verb,

actives and neuters, as

 

curritur

 

 

turbatur

Impersonals do not have gerunds and supines.

 

Of Gerunds

Gerunds can be called participial, as they are similar to participles, in the same way as we call proverbial things that are similar to proverbs.

Therefore, as we have seen little agreement among the grammarians about whether they concern more verbs or to participles, we leave them here in proximity to both parts, so that they may ascribe themselves to one of the two groups.

Moreover, they take their case from the noun, their meaning from an active, passive or neuter verb. And because they do not accept any difference of tenses for separate voices, nor of number or person, they cannot be regular participles.

 

 

di, of the genitive case

There are three terminations of gerunds

 

do, of the dative and ablative

 

 

dum, of the nominative and accusative

Although there is no doubt that most of these gerunds have an active meaning, sometimes their meaning is passive. These will be examples of passive meaning: Athenas quoque missus erudiendi causa, that is, ut erudiretur. Uritque videndo femina, that is, dum videtur. Satis ad cognoscendum illustria. Ars ad discendum facilis. {n. p.}

 

Of Supines

Supines are also rightly called participial verbs, and they have all the same characteristics of gerunds. However, they end

 

in the first case in um

ut

 

visum

 

in the last in u

 

 

visu

 

Of Participles

A participle is a part of speech which is declined by case and which derives its genders and cases from the noun, its tenses and meanings from the verb, its number and figure from both in a somehow precarious way.

 

Of the Variations of the Participle

 

 

form

 

meaning

Six things vary for the participle

 

case

 

number

 

 

tense

 

figure

However, what has been established before on form and case in the section on nouns is also to be applied here.

 

Tense

Participles have four tenses.

The present in ans, or in ens, as

 

amans

 

 

legens

On the other hand, there is no simple participle in iens from eo

but

 

euntis

 

euntem

 

in the other cases

 

 

 

eunti

 

eunte

 

 

 

{n. p.}

And in compounds like

 

abeuntis

except

 

ambiens

 

redeuntis

their gerunds also follow this form, as

 

ambientis etc.

 

 

abeundi

 

 

ambiendi

 

abeundo

except

 

ambiendo

 

abeundum

 

 

ambiendum

 

 

tus

 

doctus

however, the past tense is in

sus

as

visus

 

xus

 

nexus

the future, one indeed in rus, as

lecturus

 

 

but the other in dus, as

legendus

 

 

 

Meaning

The participles that come from active verbs have an active meaning, as

 

docens

 

docturus

 

verberans

 

verberaturus

Those that come from neuter verbs have a neuter meaning, as

 

currens

 

cursurus

 

dolens

 

doliturus

We can also find participles in dus from some neuter verbs, as

 

dubitandus

 

carendus

 

vigilandus

 

dolendus

Those that come from a passive verb have a passive meaning, as

 

lectus

 

legendus

 

auditus

 

audiendus

There are also passive participles from such neuter verbs whose third persons are used passively, as aratur terra, hence arata and aranda terra.

Participles formed from deponents imitate the meaning of their verbs, as

 

loquens

 

 

 

loquutus

 

from loquor

 

loquuturus

 

 

{n. p.}

Deponents that were once common verbs maintain the future in dus, as

 

sequendus

 

patiendus

 

loquendus

 

obliviscendus

 

utendus

 

and others of this gender

There are also deponent participles of the past tense, which have nor an active nor a passive meaning.

Vergil, nunc oblita mihi tot carmina.

Terence, meditata sunt mihi omnia mea incommoda.

Vergil, mentitaque tela agnoscunt.

Finally, participles of common verbs acquire the meaning of these verbs, as

 

criminans

 

criminaturus

 

criminatus

 

criminandus

There are no participles coming from impersonal verbs, except

 

poenitens

 

pertaesus

 

decens

 

poenitendus

 

libens

 

pudendus

These participles are derived from their verbs, contrary to the rule

 

pariturus

 

nosciturus

 

nasciturus

 

moriturus

 

sonaturus

 

oriturus

 

arguiturus

 

osurus

 

luiturus

 

futurus

 

eruiturus

 

 

These are similar to participles.

 

tunicatus

 

personatus

 

togatus

 

larvatus

And innumerable nouns of this kind.

 

Number

Participles also have the number, like the noun: {L} singular, as legens, and plurals, as legentes.

 

Of Figure

There are two figures

 

simple

as

 

spirans

 

 

compound

 

 

respirans

Sometimes participles change into participial nouns or when they take a word of a different case from their own, as

 

abundans lactis

 

patiens inediae

 

appetens alieni

 

fugitans litium

Or when they are compounded with prepositions, with which these verbs cannot be compounded themselves, as

 

infans

 

indoctus

 

innocens

 

ineptus

Or when they are compared, as

 

amans

 

doctus

 

amantior

 

doctior

 

amantissimus

 

doctissimus

Or when their ending indicates the tense. Such are the participles in rus and dus, as expectem, qui me numquam visurus abisti? That is, qui eo animo discessisti, ut me amplius non videres?

Nullam mentionem fecit cometarum, non praetermissurus, si quid explorati haberet, that is, ita affectus, ut non praetermitteret.

Amandus est doctissimusque quisque, that is, dignus est, vel debet amari.

Eiicienda est haec mollities animi, that is, debet eiici.

Participles of the present tense often become substantive nouns of the masculine gender, as

 

oriens

 

profluens

 

 

occidens

 

confluens

 

Of the feminine gender, as

 

consonans

 

 

continens

{n. p.}

Of the neuter gender, as

 

contingens

 

antecedens

 

 

accidens

 

consequens

Of the common gender, instead of the verbals in tor or trix, as

 

appetens

 

sitiens

 

diligens

 

indulgens

Animans is found sometimes in the feminine gender and sometimes in the neuter.

 

Of Adverbs

An adverb is an undeclined part of speech which, when it is added to a verb, completes and explains its meaning.

In fact, sometimes it explains just like a noun, as homo egregie impudens. Ne parum sis leno.

Other times like an adverb, as parum honeste se gerit.

 

Of the Variations of Adverbs

Adverbs vary by

 

meaning

 

form

 

comparative degree

 

figure

The different meanings are to be gathered from the circumstances of the words.

 

Adverbs of Place

These adverbs mean “in a place”

 

hic

 

ubique

 

alicubi

 

illic

 

ubicunque

 

necubi

 

istic

 

ubilibet

 

sicubi

 

intus

 

utrobique

 

inibi

 

foris

 

ubivis

 

ibidem

 

usquam

 

ubiubi

 

inferius

 

nusquam

 

ibi

 

superius

 

ubi

 

alibi

 

 

{L. ii.}

These actually concern “to a place”

 

huc

 

siquo

 

aliorsum

 

illuc

 

eo

 

dextrorsum

 

istuc

 

eodem

 

sinistrorsum

 

intro

 

quolibet

 

sursum

 

alio

 

quovis

 

deorsum

 

quo

 

quocunque

 

utroque

 

aliquo

 

foras

 

neutro

 

nequo

 

horsum

 

quoquoversum

 

quoquo

 

 

 

 

These indicate “from a place”

 

hinc

 

aliunde

 

undevis

 

illinc

 

alicunde

 

undecunque

 

istinc

 

sicunde

 

superne

 

foras

 

necunde

 

inferne

 

inde

 

indidem

 

caelitus

 

unde

 

undelibet

 

funditus

And finally, “through a place”

 

hac

 

ea

 

qua

 

illac

 

eadem

 

siqua

 

istac

 

alia

 

nequa

 

quacunque

 

aliqua

 

quaque

 

Of Time

Adverbs of time are

 

quando

 

aliquoties

 

nudiustertius

 

aliquando

 

heri

 

nudiusquartus

 

quandiu

 

hodie

 

nudiusquintus

 

quandudum

 

cras

 

nudiussextus etc.

 

quampridem

 

pridie

 

diu

 

usque

 

postridie

 

noctu

 

quousque

 

perendie

 

interdiu

 

toties

 

mane

 

nunc

 

quoties

 

vesperi

 

iam

{n. p.}

 

nuper

 

saepe

 

numquam

 

alias

 

raro

 

unquam

 

olim

 

subinde

 

adhuc

 

idem

 

identidem

 

etiam, for adhuc

 

pridem

 

plerunque

 

hactenus

 

dudum

 

quotidie

 

indiem

 

tantisper

 

quotannis

 

inhoram

 

paulisper

 

in dies

 

et similia

 

parumper

 

 

 

 

Usque is an adverb of time and place, as usque sub obscurum noctis. Ab Aethiopia est usque haec. And ubi is put instead of semper or continuo, as usque metu micuere sinus.

 

Of Number

Adverbs of number, as

 

semel

 

septies

 

bis

 

centies

 

ter

 

millies

 

quarter

 

pluries

 

quinquies

 

infinities etc.

 

Of Order

Adverbs of order are

 

inde

 

postremo

 

deinde

 

primum

 

hinc

 

iamprimum

 

dehinc

 

denique

 

novissimo

 

tandem

 

imprimis

 

adsummum etc.

 

Interrogative

Interrogative adverbs are {L. iii.}

 

cur

 

num

 

quare

 

quid ita

 

quomodo

 

quo

 

ecquid

 

unde

 

quin for cur

 

quantum

 

Exclamative

Exclamative adverbs are o, heus, and other similar ones.

 

Denying

 

 

haud

 

nequaquam

Denying adverbs, as

 

non

 

ne instead of non

 

 

minime

 

and similar ones

 

Affirmative

Affirmative adverbs, as

 

etiam

 

prorsus

 

profecto

 

sic

 

nempe

 

adeo

 

quidni

 

nimirum

 

plane

 

sane

 

certe

 

scilicet

 

Swearing

 

 

hercule

 

pol

Swearing adverbs, as

 

mehercules

 

aedepol

 

 

mediusfidius

 

castor

 

 

diusfidius

 

ecastor

 

Exhortative

 

 

age

 

agedum

Exhortative adverbs, as

 

sodes

 

ehodum

 

 

sultis

 

eia

 

 

amabo

 

agite

 

Prohibitive

Prohibitive adverbs, as ne.

 

Optative

Optative adverbs, as utinam, o, osi, si. {n. p.}

 

Excluding

 

 

modo

 

tantum

Excluding adverbs, as

 

dummodo

 

solum

 

 

tantummodo

 

duntaxat

 

 

solummodo

 

demum

 

Gathering

 

 

simul

 

populatim

Gathering adverbs, as

 

una

 

universim

 

 

pariter

 

coniunctim etc.

 

Separating

 

 

seorsim

 

privatim

 

 

gregatim

 

speciatim

Separating adverbs, as

 

egregie

 

bifariam

 

 

nominatim

 

trifariam

 

 

viritim

 

omnifariam

 

 

oppidatim

 

plurifariam

 

Of Difference

Adverbs of difference, as aliter, secus.

 

Choosing

Adverbs of choosing, as

 

potius

 

imo

 

 

potissimum

satius

 

Of Degree

 

 

valde

 

prorsus

 

 

nimis

 

penitus

Adverbs of degree, as

 

nimium

 

funditus

 

 

immodice

 

radicitus

 

 

impendio

 

omnino

 

 

impense

 

 

 

Diminishing

 

 

vix

 

sensim

Diminishing adverbs, as

 

aegre

 

pedetentim

 

 

paulatim

 

 

{n. p.}

 

Concessive

Concessive adverbs, as

 

licet

 

sit ita

 

 

esto

 

sit sane

 

Of Non-Uniqueness

Adverbs of non-uniqueness, as

 

non solum

 

non modo

 

 

non tantum

 

nedum

 

Of Quality

Adverbs of quality, as

 

docte

 

fortiter

 

 

pulchre

 

graviter

 

Of Quantity

 

 

parum

 

summum

Adverbs of quantity, as

 

minime

 

adsummum

 

 

maxime

 

et similia

 

Of Comparison

 

 

tam

 

maxime

Adverbs of comparison, as

 

quam

 

minime

 

 

magis

 

aeque

 

 

minus

 

 

 

For Unfinished Things

 

 

ferme

 

propemodum

Adverbs for unfinished things, as

 

fere

 

tantum non

 

 

prope

 

modo non

 

Demonstrative

Demonstrative adverbs, as en, ecce, sic, as sic scribito.

 

Explaining

 

 

id est

 

puta

Explaining adverbs, as

 

hoc est

 

utputa

 

 

quasi dicas

 

utpote

 

Dubitative {n. p.}

 

 

forsan

 

fors

Dubitative adverbs, ut

 

forsitan

 

fortasse

 

 

fortassis

 

 

 

Of chance

Adverbs of chance, as

 

forte

 

 

 

 

casu

 

fortuna

 

Of Similarity

 

 

sic

 

tamquam

 

 

sicut

 

quasi

Adverbs of similarity, as

 

sicuti

 

ceu

 

 

ita

 

uti

 

 

item

 

velut

 

 

itidem

 

veluti

 

Of Comparative Degree

Adverbs which are born of noun adjectives are compared and take the comparative and superlative cases, as

 

docte

 

doctius illo

 

doctissime omnium

And similarly other ones, as

 

bene

 

saepe

 

melius

 

saepius

 

optime

 

saepissime

 

male

 

nuper

 

peius

 

nuperrime

 

pessime

 

 

 

Of Form

Adverbs have two forms: base – which originates from itself, as heri, cras

and derivative, which is born from elsewhere, as {M}

 

furtim from furor

 

strictim from stringo

 

humaniter from humanus

Sometimes neuter adjectives take on the form of adverbs, imitating the Greeks, as

 

recens

 

instead of

 

recenter

 

torvum

 

 

 

torve

 

Of Figure

There are two figures

 

simple

as

 

prudenter

 

 

compound

 

 

imprudenter

 

Of Conjunctions

A conjunction is a part of speech which properly connects the clauses of sentences.

 

Of the Variations of Conjunctions

 

 

figure

Conjunctions vary in

 

power

 

 

order

 

Of Figure

There are two figures

 

simple

as

 

nam

 

 

compound

 

 

namque

 

Of Power

Power, that is, their meaning is different, in fact some of the conjunctions are copulative, as

 

et

 

atque

 

item

 

ac

 

quoque

 

itidem

 

que

 

etiam

 

cum

 

 

 

 

 

tum et tum

{n. p.} Likewise repeated, as vir tum probus, tum eruditus, are due here, as well as the opposite ones, as

 

nec

 

neu

 

neque

 

neve

The following four – et, que, nec, neque – when they are repeated, are also called suspensive, because they always make you wait for something else, as et fugit, et pugnat. Nec sapit ista, nec sentit.

 

 

aut

 

seu

Others are disjunctive, as

 

vel

 

sive

 

 

ve

 

 

And when these are repeated, they are called suspensive too, as vel scribit, vel dictat.

Others are discretive, as

 

sed

 

quidem

 

vero

 

sed enim

 

autem

 

enimvero

 

at

 

quoque

 

quodsi

 

ast

 

scilicet

 

verum

 

atqui

 

caeterum

 

porro

 

 

 

 

 

quin

Others rational or illative, as

 

ergo

 

quare

 

ideo

 

quamobrem

 

igitur

 

quocirca

 

itaque

 

proinde

 

idcirco

 

propterea

 

 

 

eare

 

Cicero, eare statim ad te Aristocritum misi.

Others are called causal, as

 

nam

 

quia

 

propterea quod

 

namque

 

quippe

 

quoniam

 

enim

 

utpote

 

quando

 

etenim

 

siquidem

 

quatenus

 

quod

 

quandoquidem

 

and for quia

{M. ii.}

Others perfective or absolutive, as

 

uti

 

quo, instead of ut

 

ne and ut, instead of ne non. Terence, sed patris vim, ut queas ferre.

 

ne, instead of ut non. Cicero, opera datur, iudicia ne fiant.

 

 

Others continuative, as

 

si

 

ni

 

 

sin

 

nisi

 

 

ne

 

num

 

utrum

Others dubitative, as

 

an

 

numquid

 

necne

 

 

anne

 

 

 

 

etsi

 

licet

 

 

Others adversative, as

 

quamquam

 

tametsi

 

 

 

 

quamvis

 

and others of this kind

Others repeating the same things, as

tamen

 

sedtamen

 

 

attamen

 

verumtamen

Others diminutive, as

 

saltem

 

certae

 

 

at

 

vel, as ne vel latum digitum cessit

 

 

quam

Others elective, as

 

ac

 

 

atque, when are taken instead of quam

 

quidem

nam

 

equidem

profecto

Others expletive, as

nimirum

vero

 

autem

enimvero

 

scilicet

sedenim

 

quoque

enim instead of certe

Vergil, nam quis te iuvenum confidentissime nostras iussit adire domos?

Terence, enim non sinam.

 

There are words that sometimes are adverbs, sometimes conjunctions, {n. p.} sometimes prepositions, as cum, which is a preposition every time it is tied to a case.

When vero is put before the subjunctive mode, it is a conjunction.

But, when it is used instead of quando, it is an adverb.

Conjunctions are distinguished from adverbs by a slight difference in gender so much that they are often confused in number, as quando, proinde, and similar ones.

 

Of Order

There are three orders of conjunctions, that is

 

prepositive

 

subjunctive

 

common

Among conjunctions, these in the first group are usually put before

 

nam

 

aut

 

quatenus

 

 

quare

 

vel

 

sin

 

 

ac

 

nec

 

seu

 

 

ast

 

neque

 

sive

 

 

atque

 

si

 

ni

 

 

et

 

quin

 

nisi

 

 

quidem

vero

 

 

Subjunctive conjunctions are

quoque

enim

 

 

 

autem

et

And there are three enclitics – que, ne, ve – so called because they incline the stress in the preceding syllable, as

Ludere qui nescit, campestribus abstinet armis,

Indoctusque pilae, discive trochive quiescit.

Finally, we call common those conjunctions which can be indifferently put before and after, as are almost all the others, except the above mentioned, as

 

equidem

 

saltem

 

ergo

 

tamen

 

igitur

 

quamquam etc.

{M. iii.}

 

Of Prepositions

A preposition is an indeclinable part of speech, which is put before other parts of speech by composition or by apposition.

Apposition, as Christus sedet ad dextram patris.

Composition, as adactum iuramentum adhibendum admonuit.

Some prepositions are found as put after, as

 

cum

 

 

quibuscum

 

tenus

as

 

pube tenus

 

versus

 

 

Angliam versus

 

usque

 

 

ad occidentem usque

 

Of the Variations of Prepositions

Prepositions follow a rule for cases, or a construction. Besides, in these cases, there is a remarkable variety of meaning, which must be learned not so much through the rules, as through constant practice of reading and writing.

 

Exempli gratia

 

Secundum

Secundum means something when I say Secundum aurem vulnus accepit. But another thing here, Secundum deum patria colenda est. And another in this sentence, Secundum quietem satis mihi felix visum sum.

 

Prepositions of the Accusative

Among the prepositions, these are joined to the accusative case.

 

Ad

Ad calendas graecas.

 

Apud

Et bene apud memores, veteris stat gratia facti.{n. p.}

 

Ante

Dicique beatus ante obitum nemo supremaque funera debet.

 

Adversus

Ne Hercules quidem adversus duos.

 

Cis

Cis Thamesim sita est Aetona.

 

Citra, ultra

Est modus in rebus, sunt certi denique fines:

Quos ultra citraque nequit consistere rectum.

 

Intra

Crede mihi bene qui latuit, bene vixit, et intra

Fortunam debet quisque manere suam.

 

 

Extra

Extra omnem ingenii aleam positus Cicero.

 

Circum

Locale est, ut circum montem.

 

Circa

Circa forum, circa viginti annos.

 

Circiter

Tempus et numerum significat.

Circiter horam decimam.

Circiter duo millia desiderati sunt.

 

Contra

Ne contra stimulum calces.

 

Erga

Princeps erga populum clemens.

 

Inter

Multa cadunt inter calicem, supremaque labra.

 

Infra

Quem ego infra omnes homines esse puto.

 

Supra

Dux hostium cum exercitu supra caput est.

 

Iuxta

Cum lucubrando iuxta ancillas lanam faceret. {n. p.}

 

Ob

Foeda mors ob oculos versabatur.

 

Per

Impiger extremos currit mercator ad Indos.

Per mare pauperiem fugiens, per saxa, per ignes.

 

Prope

Prope urbem, prope mortem.

 

Praeter

Ita fugias, ne praeter casam.

 

Propter

Aliquid mali, propter vicinum malum.

 

Post

O cives, cives, quaerenda pecunia primum, virtus post nummos.

 

Penes

Me penes est unum vasti custodia mundi.

 

Trans

Caelum, non animum mutant, qui trans mare currunt.

 

Prepositions of the ablative.

 

A

A Iove principium musae, Iovis omnia plena.

 

Ab

This is put before vowels.

Ab alio expectes, alteri quod feceris.

 

Abs

Abs quivis homine beneficium accipere, gratum est.

 

Absque

Absque eo esset.

 

Cum

Damnum appellandum est, cum mala fama, lucrum. {n. p.}

 

Clam

Clam patre, and for Plautus, clam patrem.

 

Coram

Coram senatu acta res est.

 

De

Sophistae rixantur de lana caprina.

 

E

Qui falsum testimonium dixisse convictus erat, e saxo Tarpeio deiciebatur.

 

Ex

Ex malis moribus bonae leges natae sunt.

 

Pro

Comes facundus in via pro vehiculo est.

 

Prae

Huic aliquid prae manu dederis.

 

Sine

Nulla dies sine linea ducenda est.

 

Tenus

Capuloque tenus ferrum impulit ira.

 

Prepositions of both other cases

These four demand both cases, but usually with different meanings.

 

In

In tempore veni, quod omnium rerum est primum.

Inque domos superas scandere cura fuit.

 

Sub

Sub lucem exportant calathis.

Vasto vidisse sub antro.

 

Super

Super se collocavit.

Fronde super viridi. {N}

 

Subter

Subter terram.

Densa subter testudine.

 

And there are prepositions which are never found outside composition, like

 

an

 

 

ambio

 

di

 

 

diduco

 

dis

as

 

distraho

 

re

 

 

recipio

 

se

 

 

sepono

 

con

 

 

condono

 

 

Of Interjections

An interjection is a part of speech which shows the disposition of the soul with an inelegant expression.

So, there are as many meanings of interjections as feeling of a troubled soul.

Of exultation, as euax, vah. Plautus, euax iurgio tandem uxorem abegi.

Of pain, as, heu, hoi, hei, o, ah. Terence, i intro, hoi, hei. Vergil, o dolor atque decus magnum.

Of fear, as hei, at, atat. Terence, hei vereor ne quid Andria apportet mali.

Of admiration, as pape. Terence, pape nova figura oris.

Of avoidance, as apage, apagesis. Terence, apagesis, egon formidolosus?

Of praise, as euge. Martial, cito, nequiter, euge, beate.

Of calling, as eho, oh, io. Terence, oh qui vocare.

Of mocking, hui. Terence, hui tu mihi illam laudas?

Of discovery of something unexpectedly, as atat. Terence, atat, data hercle mihi sunt verba.

Of exclamation, as o, pro, pro nefas. Seneca, o paupertas {n. p.} felix.

Of curse, as malum, uae malum. Terence, quid hoc, malum infelicitatis est?

Of laugh, as ha ha he. Terence, ha ha he defessa iam misera sum te ridendo.

Of imposing silence, as au. Terence, au ne comparandus hic quidem ad illum est.

 

Now you must observe that also nouns and sometimes verbs are put instead of an interjection, as for Vergil, navibus infandum amissis. Cicero, sed amabo te cura. In fact, every part of speech confusedly expressing a feeling of the soul performs the function of an interjection. {n. p.}

 

On the Construction of the Eight Parts

 

So far we have been discussing the eight parts of speech and their forms, as far as what pertains to etymology; now we will deal with them from the point of view of syntax, which is called “construction”.

Therefore, the construction is the correct word order of the parts of speech among themselves, according to the proper rules of grammar. So it is that the most excellent men of the past are used to those rules, both in writing and in speaking.

Besides, before we examine the structures of the parts of speech individually, those of the three concordances of grammar ought to be briefly discussed in general.

 

Agreements of the Nominative and Verb

A personal verb agrees with the nominative in number and person, as numquam sera est ad bonos mores via. Fortuna numquam perpetuo est bona.

The nominative of the first or second person is not expressed, except to make a distinction, as vos damnastis, as if to say “no one more”, or because of emphasis, as tu es patronus, tu pater, si deseris tu, perimus, as though he said, praecipue et prae aliis tu patronus es.

In verbs whose meaning pertains only to men, the nominative of the third person of is often implied, as est, fertur, dicunt, ferunt, aiunt, praedicant, clamitant, and similar ones, as fertur atrocia flagitia designasse.

Teque ferunt irae poenituisse tuae.

The verb does not always have a voice declined in the nominative case, but sometimes it has an infinitive verb, as mentiri non est meum. {n. p.} Sometimes a sentence, as adde quod ingenuas didicisse fideliter artes, emollit mores, nec sinit esse feros. Sometimes an adverb with a genitive, as partim virorum ceciderunt in bello. Partim signorum sunt combusta.

 

First Exception

Verbs of the infinite mood put before themselves an accusative instead of the nominative, as te rediisse incolumen gaudeo. Te fabulam agere volo. This mood can be resolved through quod and ut in this way: Quod tu rediisti incolumis gaudeo. Ut tu fabulam agas, volo.

 

Second Exception

Impersonal verbs are not preceded by a nominative, as taedet me vitae. Pertaesum est coniugii. De quibus suo loco.

A singular collective noun is sometimes joined to a plural verb, as pars abiere. Uterque deluduntur dolis.

 

Agreements of the noun and adjective

The adjective agrees with the noun in gender, number, and case, as rara avis in terris nigroque simillima cygno.

Participles and pronouns are connected to nouns in the same way, as donec eris felix, multos numerabis amicos.

Nullus ad amissas ibit amicus opes.

Seneca, non hoc primum pectora vulnus mea senserunt, graviora tuli.

Sometimes a sentence stands for a noun, as audito regem Doroberniam proficisci.

 

Agreements of the relative and its antecedent

The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, {N. iii.} and person, as vir bonus est quis?

Qui consulta patrum, qui leges iuraque servat.

Not only a single word, but sometimes also a sentence is used as the antecedent, as in tempore ad eam veni, quod omnium rerum est primum.

A relative which is put between antecedents with a different gender, sometimes agrees with the former, as senatus assiduam stationem eo loci peragebat, qui hodie senaculum appellatur.

Non procul ab eo flumine, quod Saliam vocant.

Propius a terra Iouis stella fertur, quae Phaeton dicitur.

Sometimes with the latter, as homines tuentur illum globum, quae terra dicitur.

Est locus in carcere quod Tullianum appellatur.

In coito lunae, quod interlunium vocant.

Sometimes a relative, and sometimes a noun or adjective responds to the primitive, which is understood in the possessive, as et laudare fortunas meas, qui haberem filium tali ingenio praeditum. Nostros vidisti flentis ocellos.

When no nominative is put between the relative and the verb, the relative will act as the nominative for the verb, as felix qui potuit boni fontem visere lucidum.

And if the nominative is put between the relative and the verb, the relative will be taken by a verb, or by another word which is put in the speech with the verb, as Ovid, gratia ab officio, quod mora tardat, abest.

Cuius numen adoro.

Quorum optimum ego habeo.

Cum similem non vidi.

Quo dignum indicavi.

Quo melius nemo scribit.

Quem videndo obstupuit.

Lego Vergilium, prae quo, caeteri poetae sordent etc. {n. p.}

 

Of the Construction of Nouns

When two substantives with different meaning come together, the latter is put in the genitive, as crescit amor nummi, quantum ipsa pecunia crescit

 

rex pater patriae

 

cultor agri

 

princeps spes Angliae

 

arma Achillis

And this genitive is sometimes changed into a possessive, as

 

patris domus

 

heri filius

 

paterna domus

 

herilis filius

Sometimes it is also turned into dative, as urbi pater est, urbique maritus.

Herus tibi, mihi pater.

 

Exception

The nouns in the same case that are connected an apposition make an exception, as effodiuntur opes irritamenta malorum.

Ignavum fucos pecus a praesepibus arcent.

An adjective put in the neuter gender absolute sometimes requires a genitive, as paulum pecuniae, hoc noctis. Non videmus manticae quod in tergo est.

Quantum quisque sua nummorum servat in arca, tantum habet et fidei.

Other times a genitive is put due to an understood noun, as in sentences of this kind.

Ubi ad Dianae Veneris, ito ad dexteram. Ventum erat ad Vestae. In both examples templum is understood.

Hectoris Andromache: uxor is understood. Delphobe Glauci: filia is understood. Huius video Byrriam: servum is understood.

 

Praise and dispraise

The praise and dispraise of a thing can be expressed in different ways, but the most frequent is {n. p.} with the ablative or genitive, as Edouardum nostrum eximia spe, summaque virtute principem fac erudias. Vir nulla fide. Obscuri generis nebulo. Ingenui vultus puer, ingenuique pudoris.

 

Opus and usus

Opus and usus require the ablative, as autoritate tua nobis opus est. Gellius, pecuniam qua sibi nihil esset usus, ab iis quibus sciret usui esse, non accepit.

But opus is sometimes put instead of the adjective necessarius. Cicero, dux nobis et autor opus est. Likewise, dicis nummos mihi opus esse, ad apparatum triumphi. Terence, alia quae opus sunt, para.

 

Of the Construction of Adjectives

Genitive

Adjectives which mean desire, acquaintance, memory, and their contraries take the genitive, as est natura hominum novitatis avida.

Mens futuri praescia. Memor esto brevis aevi.

Imperitos rerum eductos libere in fraudem illicis.

Non sum animi dubius, sed devius aequi.

Graecarum literarum rudis.

Verbal adjectives in ax likewise take the genitive

 

 

audax ingenii

 

utilium sagax

as

 

tempus edax rerum

 

propositi tenax

 

 

virtus est vitiorum fugax

 

pecuniarum petax etc.

Moreover, a great number of adjectives connected through no fixed rule requires the genitive case, a quite wide variety of which have been collected by Linacre and Despauterius. You will make them familiar through constant readings.

Partitive nouns, some nouns used partitively some interrogative {n. p.} nouns, or some numeral nouns take the genitive, from which they also borrow their gender, as quorum alter te scientia augere potest, altera exemplis.

Utrum horum mavis accipe.

Quisquis fuit ille deorum.

An quisquam gentium est aeque miser, as ego? Dium promittere nemo auderet.

Tres fratrum. Quatuor iudicium.

Sapientum octavus quis fuerit, non dum constat.

Primus regum Romanorum fuit Romulus.

Nevertheless, in another sense they require the ablative case with a preposition, as primus ab Hercule. Tertius ab Aenea. But in another sense the dative, as nulli pietate secundus. However, they are also used with these prepositions, e, de, ex, inter, ante, as est deus e vobis alter.

Solus de superis.

Primus inter omnes.

Primus ibi ante omnes, magna comitante caterva.

The question and its answer will be of the same case and tense, as quarum rerum est nulla satietas? Divitiarum. Quid rerum nunc geritur in Anglia? Consulitur de religione.

This rule does not apply every time there is a question with cuius, cuia, cuium, as cuium pecus? Laniorum. Or else with a sentence of a different syntax, as furti ne accusas, an homicidi, an utroque? Finally, it does not apply when the question is to be replied with the possessives meus, tuus, suus etc., as cuius hic codex? Meus.

Comparative and superlative nouns taken as partitives require a genitive case, from which they get their gender. Comparatives create a comparison between two nouns, superlatives between more than two, as manuum fortior est dextera, digitorum medius est longissimus. However, they are taken partitively when they are expressed through e, ex, or inter, as Vergilius poetarum doctissimus, that is, ex poetis, or inter poetas.

When comparatives are expressed through quam, they take the ablative case, as vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. {O} They also take another ablative which means the measure of the excess, as quanto doctior es, tanto te geras submissius.

Tanto, quanto, multo, longe, aetate, natu, are put to both degrees, as tanto pessimus omnium poeta, quanto tu optimus omnium patronus.

Nocturnae lucubrationes longe periculosissimae habentur.

Longe caeteris peritior es, sed non multo melior tamen.

Omne animi vitium, tanto conspectius in se crimen habet, quanto maior qui peccat habetur.

Maior et maximus natu. Maior et maximus aetate.

 

Dative

Adjectives which mean advantage, disadvantage, similarity, dissimilarity, delight, discontent, or relation to someone, take the dative case, as sis bonus o felixque tuis.

Turba gravis paci, placidaeque inimica quieti.

Est finitimus oratori poeta.

Qui color albus erat, nunc est contrarius albo.

Iucundus amicis, omnibus supplex.

Si facis ut patriae sit idoneus, utilis agro.

Here you will find the adjectives that are compounded with the preposition con, as contubernalis, commilito, conservus, cognatus, etc. Some of these adjectives that mean similarity also have the genitive, as quem metuis, par huius erat.

Patres aequum esse censent, nos iamiam a pueris, illico nasci senes, neque illarum affines esse rerum, quas fert adolescentia.

Domini similis es.

Mens conscia recti.

Praeterea regina, tui fidissima, dextra occidit ipsa, sua.

Communis, alienus, immunis serve different cases, as Cicero, commune animantium omnium est coniunctionis {n. p.} appetitus, procreandi causa. Mors omnibus communis hoc mihi tecum commune est. Sallust, non aliena consilii. Seneca, alienus ambitioni. Cicero, non alienus a Scevolae studiis. Ovid, vobis immunibus huius esse mali dabitur. Pliny, caprificus omnibus immunis est.

Immunes ab illis malis sumus.

Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, sometimes are also joined with accusative, as natus ad gloria.

Verbal adjectives in bilis, like participials in dus, take the passive.

The dative is added, as o mihi post nullos, multum memorande sodales, nulli penetrabilis astro, lucus erat.

 

Accusative

Size is indicated by adjectives in the accusative, as gnomon septem pedes longus, umbram non amplius quatuor pedes longam reddit. Sometimes also in the ablative, as fons latus pedibus tribus, altus triginta. And sometimes also in the genitive: Columella, in morem horti areas latas pedum denum, longas pedum quinquagenum facito.

 

Ablative

Adjectives which pertain to abundance or lack sometimes have the ablative, and sometimes the genitive, as amor et melle et felle est fecundissimus.

Dives agris, dives positis in fenore nummis.

Referunt se nocte minores, crura thymo plena.

Quae regio in terris, nostri non plena laboris?

Dives opum, dives pietati vestis et auri.

O curvae in terras animae et caelestium inanes.

Nouns expressing diversity come together with the ablative with a preposition, as alter ab illo. Aliud ab hoc. Diversus ab isto. {O. ii.}

Adjectives take the ablative when it means a cause, as pallidus ira. Incurvus senectute. Livida armis brachia. Trepidus morte futura.

The form or the mode of a thing is added to nouns in the ablative case, as facies miris modis pallida. Nomine grammaticus. Re Barbarus. Sum tibi natura parens, praeceptor consiliis. Troianus origine Caesar. Spe dives, re pauper. Syrus natione.

Dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, extorris, are increased with an ablative case, as dignus es odio.

Qui filium haberem tali ingenio praeditum.

Atque oculis capti fodere cubilia talpae.

Sorte tua contentus abi.

Some of these sometimes require a genitive case, as militia est operis altera digna tui.

Discendam magnorum haud quamquam indignus aurorum.

 

Of the Construction of Pronouns

Mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, the genitives of primitive pronouns, are used when a passion is signified, as languet desiderio tui. Parsque tui latitat corpore clausa meo. Imago nostri.

Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, are added when an action it is expressed, as favet desiderio tuo, imago nostra.

The genitives nostrum and vestrum follow distributives, partitives, comparatives, and superlatives, as unusquisque vestrum.

Nemo nostrum. Ne cui vestrum sit mirum.

Maior nostrum. Maximus natu vestrum.

These possessives meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, have these genitives after them, ipsius, solius, unius, duorum, trium and moreover omnium, plurium, paucorum, cuiusque {n. p.} and the genitive of participles, as ex tuo ipsius animo coniecturam feceris. Dico mea unius opera rempublica esse liberatam. Meum solius peccatum corrigi non potest. Noster duorum eventus ostendat, utra gens sit melior. In sua cuiusque laude praestantior. Nostra omnium memoria. Vestris paucorum respondet laudibus. Cum mea nemo scripta legat, vulgo recitare timentis.

Sui and suus are reflexives, that is, they always reflected what precedes them in the same sentence, as nimium admirantur se. Parcit erroribus suis. Or they are connected through a copula, as magnopere Petrus rogat, ne se deseras. Cicero reminiscitur clientum suorum.

Among the pronouns, ipse represents the meaning of three persons, as ipse vidi, ipse loquere, ipse dixit.

And it is connected to nouns and equally to pronouns, as ipse ego, ipse ille, ipse Hercules.

Idem can also be added to all persons, as ego idem adsum. Idem has nuptias perge facere. Idem iungat vulpes et mulgeat hircos.

These demonstratives hic, ille, iste, are distinguished thus:

Hic indicates somebody who is near to me; iste somebody who is near you; ille indicates somebody who is distant from both of us.

Ille is used when we refer to something for its excellence, as Alexander ille magnus. Iste is employed when we mention something with scorn, as istum aemulum quo ad poteris ab ea pellito.

When hic and ille refer to two nouns placed before, hic must be referred to the second and nearer one, ille must be referred to the first and most distant one, as Agricolae contrarium est pastoris propositum, ille quam maxime subacto et puro solo gaudet, hic novali graminosque, ille fructum e terra sperat, hic e pecore. {O. iii.}

 

Of the Construction of Verbs

Nominative after Verbs

Substantive verbs, as sum, forem, fio, existo, passive verbs for calling, as nominor, appellor, dicor, vocor, nuncupor, and similar ones, as scribor, salutor, habeor, existimor, and also verbs of action, as sedeo, dormio, incedo, curro require a nominative both before and after, as Deus est summus bonum. Perpusilli vocantur nani.

Fides, religionis nostrae fundamentum habetur.

Malus pastor dormit supinus.

Homo incedit erectus in caelum.

Finally, almost all verbs have the nominative of an adjective noun after them, as rex mandavit primus extirpari idololatriam. Pii orant taciti. Boni discunt seduli.

Likewise, the infinitive mood has the same case both before and after, especially when the optative verbs are next to their similar, as hypocrita cupit videri iustus, hypocrita cupit se videri iustum.

Malo dives esse quam haberi, malo me divitem esse quam haberi.

Natura beatis omnibus esse dedit, si quis cognoverit uti.

Nobis non licet esse tam disertis, vel disertos.

Expedit bonas esse vobis.

Quo mihi commisso non licet esse piam?

 

Genitive after Verbs

Sum requires a genitive every time it means possession, or to pertain to something, as pecus est Melibaei.

Adolescentis est, maiores natu ve reri.

Regum est parcere subiectis et debellare superbos. {n. p.}

These nominatives, meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, vestrum, humanum, belvinum, and similar ones make an exception as non est meum contra autoritatem senatus dicere. Eia haud vestrum est iracundos esse. Humanum est irasci. But here officium seems to be understood, whereas sometimes it is expressed, as ut tuum est officium, has bene ut adsimules nuptias.

Verbs of thought take the genitive, as plurimi passim fit pecunia.

Pudor parvi penditur.

Nihili, vel pro nihilo habentur literae.

Pluris opes nunc sunt, quam prisci temporis annis.

Aestimo takes either the genitive or the ablative, as non huius te aestimo. Magno ubique virtus aestimanda est.

Flocci, nauci, nihili, pili, assis, huius, teruncii are added especially to these verbs aestimo, pendo, facio, as ego illum flocci pendo. Nec huius facio, qui me pili aestimat. These are singular. Aequi boni consulo. Aequi boni facio, that is, in bonam accipio partem.

Verbs of accusation, condemnation, admonition, absolution, and similar ones that indicate a crime take the genitive, as qui alterum incusat probri, ipsum se intueri oportet.

Etiam sceleris condemnat generum suum.

Parce tuum vatem sceleris damnare cupido.

Admoneto illum pristinae fortunae.

Monachi, voti absoluti sunt.

Sometimes this genitive is turned into an ablative, both with or without a preposition, as si in me iniquus es iudex?

Condemnabo te eodem crimine.

Uxorem de pudicitia graviter accusavit.

Putavi ea de re admonendum esse te.

Uterque, nullus, alter, neuter, alius, ambo, and their superlative degree of this kind, are not placed with verbs unless they are in the ablative, as accusas furti, an stupri, an utroque? Sive de utroque? Ambobus? Vel de ambobus? Neutro vel de neutro. {n. p.} De plurimis simul accusaris.

Satago, misereor, miseresco take the genitive, as is rerum suarum satagit.

Oro miserere laborum.

Tantorum, miserere animi non digna ferentis.

Et generis miseresce tui.

And misereor and miseresco are found with a dative more rarely.

Seneca, huic succurro, huic misereor.

Boetius, dilige iure bonos et miseresce malis.

Reminiscor, obliviscor, memini have the genitive or accusative, as datae fidei reminiscitur. Proprium est stultitiae, aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci suorum. Faciam, ut meique et huius diei ac loci, semper memineris. Omnia quae curant, senes meminerunt. Memini de hac re, de armis, de te id est mentionem feci.

Potior is joined both to a genitive or an ablative, as Romani signorum et armorum potiti sunt.

Egressi optata potiuntur Troes arena.

 

Dative after Verbs

All the verbs meaning an increase take the dative of the thing that is increased in any way, as mihi istic nec seritur nec metitur.

Nescio quis teneros oculus mihi fascinat agnos.

Verbs of different kinds follow this rule.

First of all, verbs which mean advantage or disadvantage take the dative, as illa seges demum votis respondet avari Agricolae.

Non potes mihi nec commodare nec incommodare.

Validis incumbite remis.

Suam eruditionem tibi acceptam fert.

Among these, some are also expressed with the accusative, as unum studetis omnes, unum sentitis. {n. p.}

Si ea memorem quae ad ventris victum conducunt, mora est.

In haec studia incumbite.

Natura ne plus ad eloquentiam confert, an doctrina? Fessum, quies plurimum iuvat.

Verbs of comparison take the dative, as sic parvis componere magna solebam.

Fratri se et opibus et dignatione adaequavit.

Sometimes an ablative is added, as comparo Vergilium cum Homero.

Verbs related togiving and returning take the dative, as fortuna multis nimis dat, satis nulli.

Ingratus est, qui gratiam bene merenti non reponit.

These verbs have different constructions, as dono tibi munus.

Dono te munere.

Huic rei aliquid temporis impertias.

Plurima salute Parmenonem suum summum impertit Gnato.

Aspersit mihi labem. Aspersit me labe.

Instravit equo penulam, instravit equum penula.

Ut piget infido consuluisse viro id est dedisse consilium.

Rectoremque ratis de cunctis consulit astris id est petit consilium.

Pessime istuc in te atque in illum consulis.

Metuo, timeo, formido tibi and a te or de te that is sum sollicitus pro te.

Metuo, timeo, formido te, scilicet ne mihi noceas.

Verbs related to promising or assuring take the dative, as haec tibi promitto, ac recipio sanctissime esse observaturum. Aes alienum mihi numeravit.

Verbs related to ordering and announcing take the dative, as imperat aut servit collecta pecunia cuique.

Quid de quoque viro et cui dicas saepe caveto.

We say tempero, moderor tibi and te.

Refero tibi and ad te. Likewise,

Refero ad senatum, that is, propono, scribo, mitto tibi and ad te.

Do tibi literas, ut ad aliquem feras, do ad te literas that is mitto. {P}

Verbs related to trusting take the dative, as vacuis committere ventis, nil nisi laeve decet.

Mulieri ne credas, ne mortuae quidem.

Verbs related to obeying and opposing take the dative, as semper obtemperat pius filius patri.

Quae homines arant, navigant, aedificant, virtuti omnia parent.

Ipsum hunc orabo, huic supplicabo.

Venienti occurrite morbo.

Ignavis precibus fortuna repugnat.

But among them, some are coupled with other cases.

Ad amorem nihil potuit accedere.

Illud constat omnibus, seu inter omnes.

Haec fratri mecum non conveniunt.

Saevis inter se convenit ursis.

Ausculto tibi that is obedio. Ausculto te that is audio.

Adamas dissidet magneti, or cum magnete.

Certat illi, or cum illo.

Tu dic mecum quo pignore certes.

Verbs related to threat and rage take the a dative, as utrique mortem minatus est.

Adolescenti nihil est quod succenseat.

Sum and its compounds, except possum, require the dative, as rex pius est reipublicae ornamento.

Mihi nec obest, nec prodest.

Multa petentibus, desunt multa.

 

Verbs compounded with these prepositions require the dative:

 

Prae

Ego meis maioribus virtute praeluxi.

But praeeo meaning vinco, praecedo, praecurro, praevertor, is joined to the accusative.

 

Ad

Albo gallo ne manum admoliaris.

 

Con

Mulier quaedam ex Andro, commigravit huic viciniae. {n. p.}

 

Sub

Subolet iam uxori, quod ego machinor.

 

Ante

Iniquissimam pacem, iustissimo bello antefero.

 

Post

Omnes posthabui mihi res, ita ut par fuit.

 

Ob

Quum nemini obtrudi potest, itur ad me.

 

In

Impendet omnibus periculum.

 

Inter

Malleolus vitibus interserendus est.

 

A few of them sometimes change the dative into other cases, as praestat ingenio alius, alium.

Multos virorum anteit sapientia. In amore haec insunt vitia. Interdico tibi aqua et igni.

Est instead of habeo requires the dative, as velle suum cuique est, nec voto vivitur uno.

Est mihi namque domi pater, est iniusta noverca.

Suppetit is in this manner, as pauper enim non est, cui rerum suppetit usus.

Sum with many other verbs takes a double dative, as exitio est avidis mare nautis.

Speras tibi laudi fore, quod mihi vitio vertis.

Nemo sibi mimos accipere debet favori.

Suo sibi gladio hunc iugulavit. Here the dative is added for embellishment.

 

Accusative after Verbs

Transitive verbs of any kind, whether active, common, or deponent, requirethe accusative, as percontatorem fugito, nam garrulus idem est, {P. ii.} nec retinent patulae commissa fideliter aures .

Imprimis venerare deos. Aper agros depopulatur.

And neuter verbs also admit the accusative of a similar meaning, as tertiam aetatem hominum vivebat Nestor.

Longam incomitata videtur tre viam.

Duram servit servitutem.

Authors often change this accusative into an ablative, as diu videor vita vivere.

Ire recta via.

Morte obiit repentina.

And there are some verbs which have an accusative in a figurative sense, as nec vox hominem sonat, o dea certe.

Qui Curios simulant et Bacchanalia vivunt.

Pastillos Rufillus olet, Gorgonius hircum.

 

Double Accusatives

Verbs related to asking, teaching, clothing take a double accusative, as tu modo posce deum veniam.

Dedocebo te istos mores.

Ridiculum est, te me admonere istud.

Induit se calceos, quos prius exuerat.

The verbs related to asking sometimes change one of the two accusatives into an ablative, as ipsum obtestemur, veniamque oremus ab ipso.

Suspitionem istam ex illis quaere.

The verbs related to clothing sometimes change one of the two accusatives into an ablative or dative, as induo te tunica, or tibi tunicam. Hoc te celavimus unum. Bassus noster, de hoc me celavit.

 

Ablative after Verbs

Any verb admits an ablative meaning instrument, cause, or mode of action. {n. p.}

 

Instrument

Daemona non armis, sed morte subegit Iesus.

Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurrit.

Hi iaculis, illi certant defendere saxis.

 

Cause

Gaudeo (ita me dii ament) gnati causa.

Invidus alterius rebus macrescit opimis.

Vehementer ira excanduit.

 

Mode

Mira celeritate rem peregit.

Dum vires animique sinunt, tolerate laborem,

Iam veniet tacito curva senecta pede.

 

Sometimes a preposition is added to the ablative of cause and mode, as Baccharis prae ebrietate.

Summa cum humanitate tractavit hominem.

A noun in the ablative case expressing the worth should be placed after those verbs, as teruncio seu vitiosa nuce non emerim.

Multo sanguine ac vulneribus ea victoria stetit.

Vili, paulo, minimo, magno, nimio, plurimo, dimidio, duplo are often added without substantives, as redime captum quam queas minimo. Vili venit triticum, constat parvo fames, magno fastidium.

These genitives, expressed without substantive, make an exception: tanti, quantipluris, minoris, tantivis, tantidem, quantilibet, quanticumque, as tanti eris aliis, quanti tibi fueris.

Non vendo pluris quam alii, fortasse etiam minoris.

Vix Priamus tanti totaque Troia fuit.

But if substantives are added, they are expressed in the ablative, as tanta mercede docuit, quanta hactenus nemo. {P. iii.}

Minori precio vendidi, quam emi.

Sometimes valeo also is found to be joined with an accusative, as denarii dicti, quod denos aeris valebant, quinarii quod quinos.

Verbs related to exceeding, fulfilling, oppressing and others of different kind take the ablative, as amore abundans Antipho.

Malo virum pecunia, quam pecuniam viro indigentem.

Sylla omnes suos divitiis explevit.

Hoc te crimine expedi.

Homines nequissimi, quibus te onerarunt mendaciis?

Ego hoc te fasce levabo.

Aliquem familiarem suo sermone participavit.

Some of them are sometimes expressed with the genitive, as quam dives nivei pecoris, quam lactis abundans.

Quasi tu huius indigeas patris.

Quid est, quod in hac causa defensionis egeat?

Implentur veteris Bacchi, pinguisque ferinae.

Postquam dextra fuit caedis saturata.

Omnes mihi labores leves fuere, praeterquam tui carendum quod erat.

Paternum servum sui participavit consilii.

Fungor, fruor, utor and similar verbs can be joined to ablative.

Qui adipisci veram gloriam volunt, iustitiae fungantur officiis.

Optimum est aliena frui insania.

In re mala, animo si bono utare, iuvat.

Aspice venturo laetentur ut omnia saeclo.

Qui sua victoria tam insolenter gloriarentur.

Destruit, aedificat, mutat quadrata rotundis.

Vescor carnibus.

Haud equidem tali me dignor honore.

Ut malis gaudeat alienis.

Exemplorum multitudine supersidendum est.

Regni eum societate muneravit.

Communicabo te semper mensa mea.

Prosequor te amore, laude, honore, etc., that is, amo, {n. p.} laudo, honoro.

Afficio te gaudio, supplicio, dolore etc., that is, exhilaro, punio, contristo.

Mereor is attached to the ablative with these adverbs, bene, male, melius, peius, optime, pessime, as de me nunquam bene meritus es.

Erasmus de lingua latina optime meritus est.

Catilina pessime de republica meruit.

Certain verbs related to receiving, distancing, and removing wish for an ablative with a preposition, as istuc a multis iam pridem audiveram.

A trepido vix abstinet ira magistro.

Nasci a principibus fortuitum est.

Procul abest ab urbe imperator.

Here the ablative is sometimes changed into a dative, as vivere si recte nescis, discede peritis.

Est virtus placitis abstinuisse bonis.

Heu fuge nate dea teque his (ait) eripe flammis.

The ablative meaning the measure of excess is added to the verbs that are strengthened by the comparison, as deforme existimabat, quos dignitate praestaret, ab iis virtutibus superari.

An ablative taken absolutely is added to any verb, as imperante Augusto natus est Christus, imperante Tyberio crucifixus.

Credo pudicitiam Saturno rege moratam in terris.

Nil desperandum Christo duce et auspice Christo.

Iam Maria, audito Christum venisse, cucurrit.

The ablative case is added to some verbs through a synecdoche and an accusative in poetry, as aegrotat animo magis quam corpore.

Candet dentes. Rubet capillos. {n. p.}

Nevertheless, some verbs are expressed in the genitive case, as absurde facis, qui angas te animi.

Exanimatus pendet animi.

Desipiebam mentis.

Plautus, discrucior animi, quia ab domo abeundum est mihi.

Divers cases, for many reasons, can be placed near the same verb, as dedit mihi vestem pignori, te presente, propria manu.

The ablative of the agent is added to passive verbs but, when a preposition is put before, sometimes also a dative can be added, as laudatur ab his, culpatur ab illis.

Honesta bonis viris, non occulta petuntur.

The participles of which more often take the dative, as nulla tuarum audita mihi nec visa sororum.

Oblitusque meorum, obliviscendus et illis.

Passive verbs preserve the other cases that were of the active ones, as accusaris a me furti. Habeberis ludibrio. Dedoceberis a me istos mores. Privaberis magistratu.

The neuter passive vapulo, veneo, liceo, exulo, fio have a passive construction, as a praeceptore vapulabis.

Malo a cive spoliari quam ab hoste venire.

Quid fiet ab illo? Virtus parvo precio licet ab omnibus.

Cur a conviviis exulat philosophia?

Infinitive verbs are usually placed after certain verbs and certain adjectives, as iuvat usque morari et conferre gradum.

Dicere quae puduit, scribere iussit amor.

Vis fieri dives Pontice? Nil cupias.

Et erat tum dignus amari.

Audax omnia perpeti gens humana ruit, per veritum nefas.

Sometimes they are used absolutely and allegorically, as haeccine fieri flagitia?

Criminibus terrere novis, hinc spargere voces.

Et quaerere conscius arma that is terrebat, spergebat, {n. p.} quaerebat.

 

Of Gerunds

Gerunds and supines take the case of their own verbs, as efferor studio videndi parentes.

Utendum est aetate, cito pede labitur aetas.

Scitatum oracula Phaebi mittimus.

 

Di

Gerunds in di depend on both some nouns and some adjectives, as et quae tanta fuit Romam tibi causa videndi?

Cecropias innatus apes amor urget habendi.

Aeneas celsa in puppi, iam certus eundi.

In poetry, an infinitive is put instead of a gerund, as studium quibus arva tueri. Peritus medicari.

Sometimes also the genitive of the plural is added, elegantly, to gerunds, as quum illorum videndi gratia me in forum contulissem.

Date crescendi copiam novarum.

Concessa est diripiendi pomorum atque obsoniorum licentia.

 

Do

Gerunds in do depend on these prepositions

 

a

 

de

 

cum

 

ab

 

e

 

in

as

 

abs

 

ex

 

pro

Ignavi a discendo cito deterrentur.

Amor et amicitia, utrumque ab amando dictum est.

Ex defendendo quam ex accusando uberior gloria comparatur.

Consultatur de transeundo in Galliam.

Recte scribendi ratio cum loquendo iuncta est.

Pro vapulando ab hoste mercedem petam.

They are also used without preposition, as alitur vitium crescitque tegendo. {Q}

Scribendo disces scribere.

 

Dum

Gerunds in dum depend on these prepositions

 

inter

 

ob

 

ante

 

propter

 

ad

 

 

Inter cenandum hilares este.

Ante damnandum ingentes tollent animos.

Locus ad agendum amplissimus.

Ob absolvendum munus ne acceperis.

Veni propter te redimendum.

When necessity is implied , they are used without the preposition and with the added verb est, as orandum est, ut sit mens sana in corpore sano.

Vigilandum est ei qui cupit vincere.

 

Gerunds are Changed into Nouns

Gerunds are changed into nouns adjectives, as tantus amor florum, et generandi gloria mellis.

Ad accusandos homines duci praemio, proximum latrocinio est.

Cur adeo delectaris criminibus inferendis?

 

Of Supines

Tum

The first supine has an active meaning and follows a verb or a participle meaning motions towards a place, as spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur in ipsae.

Milites sunt missi speculatum arcem.

However, these sentences do venum, do filiam nuptum imply a hidden movement.

But this supine in neuter passive verbs and with the infinitive in iri has a passive meaning, as coctum ego non vapulatum, dudum conductus sum. Postquam audierat non datum iri uxorem {n. p.} filio. Poets say eo visere, vado videre.

The supine is also put absolutely with verb est, as ilicet peristi. Itum est in viscera terrae. Cessatum est satis.

 

Tu

The second supine has a passive meaning and follows nouns adjectives, as sum extra noxam, sed non est facile purgatu.

Quod factu foedum est, idem est dictu turpe.

Qui pecunia non movetur, hunc dignum spectatur arbitramur. But in these sentences, surgit cubitu and redit venatu, cubitu and venatu need to be considered as nouns rather than supines.

 

Of Time and Place

Time

Nouns which mean a part of time are more frequently used in the ablative, rarely in the accusative. Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit. Nocte latent mendae.

Id tempus creatus est consul.

But nouns which indicate a duration of time are expressed in the accusative, and sometimes in the ablative, as hic iam ter centum totos regnabitur annos.

Noctes atque dies patet atri ianua Ditis.

Hic tamen hac mecum poteris requiescere nocte.

Imperavit triennio et decem mensibus, octoque diebus.

Dicimus etiam. In paucis diebus, de die, de nocte.

Promitto in diem. Commodo in mensem. Annos ad quinquaginta natus. Per tres annos studui. Puer id aetatis. Non plus triduum or triduo. Tertio, or ad tertium calendas or calendarum.

 

Distance of a place

The distance of a place is expressed in the accusative and sometimes in the ablative, as die quibus in terris (et eris mihi magnus Apollo.) {Q. ii.}

Treis pateat caeli spatium, non amplius ulnas.

Iam mille passus processeram. Abest bidui, space is left out. Abest ab urbe quingentis passuum millibus.

 

Appellatives of Places

Nouns appellatives and nouns of the major places are commonly added with a preposition to verbs that mean “in a place”, “to a place”, “from a place”, or “through a place”, as in foro versatur. Meruit sub rege in Gallia.

Ad templum non aequae palladis ibant.

Iliades.

Legantur in Hispaniam maiores natu nobiles.

E Sicilia decedens Rhodum veni.

Per mare ibis ad Indos.

Every verb admits the genitive of the proper name of a place in which an action takes place, as long as it is of the first or second declension and of singular number. Quid Romae faciam? Mentiri nescio. Samia mihi mater fuit: ea habitabat Rhodi.

These genitives, humi, domi, militiae, belli are used instead of proper names, as domi bellique simul viximus.

Parvi sunt foris arma, nisi est consilium domi.

Domi does not accept other genitives with itself than meae, tuae, suae, nostrae, vestrae, alienae, as versor domi meae, non alienae.

But only if the proper name of a place is of plural number, or of the third declension, it is put in the dative or ablative, as Colchus an Assyrius, Thebis nutritus, an Argis.

Suetonius, Lentulus Getulicus Tiburi genitum scribit.

Livy, neglectum Anxuri praesidium.

Cicero, cum una sola legione fuit Carthagini.

Romae Tibur amem ventosus, Tibure Romam.

Cicero, cum tu Narbone mensas hospitum convomeres.

Idem. Commendo tibi domum eius, quae est Sycione.

So we use ruri or rure in the ablative, as ruri fere se continet. Rure paterno est sibi far modicum. {n. p.}

 

To a Places

The proper name of a place is added in the accusative to verbs that imply motion towards a place, as concessi Cantabrigiam ad capiendum ingenii cultum. Eo Londinum ad merces emendas. Ad hunc modum utimur rus et domus, ut ego rus ibo. Ite domum saturae, venit hesperum, ite capellae.

 

From a Place, Through a Place

The proper name of a place is added in the ablative to verbs that imply motion from a place or through a place, as nisi ante Roma profectus esses, nunc eam relinqueres.

Eboraco sive per Eboracum sum facturus iter.

Domus and rus are used in the same way, as nuper exiit domo. Timeo ne pater rure redierit.

 

On the Construction of Impersonal Verbs

Genitive

These three impersonal verbs, interest, refert and est, are joined to any genitive except those of mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra and cuia, as interest magistratus tueri bonos, animadvertere in malos.

Refert multum Christianae reipublicae episcopos doctos et pios esse.

Prudentis est multa dissimulare.

Tua refert teipsum nosse.

Ea caedes crimini potissimum datur ei, cuia interfuit, non ei, cuia nihil interfuit.

These genitives are also added tanti, quanti, magni, parvi, quanticumque, tantidem, as magni refert, quibuscum vixeris. Tanti refert honesta agere. Vestra parvi interest. Et interest ad laudem meam. {Q. iii.}

 

Dative

These impersonal verbs are expressed with the dative case: accidit, certum est, contingit, constat, confert, competit, conducit, convenit, displicet, dolet, expedit, evenit, liquet, libet, licet, nocet, obest, prodest, praestat, patet, stat, placet, restat, benefit, malefit, statisfit, superest, sufficit, vacat, as convenit mihi tecum.

Emori per virtutem mihi praestat, quam per dedecus vivere.

Non vacat exiguis rebus adesse Iovi.

Dolet dictum imprudenti adolescenti et libero, subauditur esse.

A noverca malefit privignis.

A deo nobis benefit. Stat casus renovare omnes.

 

Accusative

These impersonal verbs require an accusative case: iuvat, decet, dedecet, delectat, oportet, as me iuvat ire per altum. Uxorem aedes curare decet.

Dedecet viros muliebriter rixari.

Cato, patrem familias vendacem, non emacem esse oportet.

The preposition ad is added to these: attinet, pertinet, spectat, as me ne vis dicere quod ad te attinet?

Spectat ad omnes bene vivere.

Quintilian, pertinet in utramque partem.

 

Accusative with the Genitive

The accusative with the genitive is added to these impersonal verbs:poenitet, taedet, miseret, miserescit, pudet, piget, as Cicero, si ad centesimum vixisset annum, senectutis cum suae non poeniteret.

Taedet animam meam vitae meae.

Aliorum te miseret, tui nec te miseret, nec pudet.

Fratris me quidem pudet pigetque.

Some impersonal verbs sometimes return to being personal, {n. p.} as non omnes arbusta iuvant.

Nanque decent animos mollia regna tuos.

Agricolam arbor ad frugem perducta delectat.

Nemo miserorum commiserescit.

Te non pudet istud? Non te haec pudent?

Coepit, incipit, desinit, debet, solet and potest, joined to impersonal verbs, take up the impersonal form, as ubi primum coeperat non convenire, quaestio oriebatur.

Taedere solet avaros impendii. Desinit illum studii taedere. Sacerdotem inscitiae pudere debet.

Pervenire ad summum, nisi ex principiis non potest.

An impersonal verb of the passive voice obtains a similar case with personal passives, as ab hostibus constanter pugnatur.

But this case sometimes is not expressed, as strato discumbitur ostro.

An impersonal verb of the passive voice can be accepted indifferently instead of every person of both numbers, as statur, that is, sto, stas, stamus, statis, stant.

 

Of the Construction of Participles

Participles take the case of verbs from which they are derived, as duplices tendens ad sidera palmas, talia voce refert.

Ubera lacte domum referent distenta capellae.

Diligendus ab omnibus. Although usually this is in dative, as restat Chremes qui mihi exorandus est.

 

Genitive

When participles become nouns, they require a genitive, as alieni appetens. Sui profusus. Cupientissimus tui.

Inexpertus belli. Indoctus pilae. {n. p.}

 

Accusative

Exosus, perosus, pertaesus, are carried out in the accusative, as immundam segnitiem perosae. Astronomus exosus ad unum mulieres. Pertaesus ignaviam suam.

Exosus and perosus are also found with the dative case, as Germani Romanis perosi sunt. Exosus deo et sanctis.

 

Ablative

Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creatus, ortus, editus are carried out in the ablative, as bona bonis prognata. Sate sanguine dium.

Quo sanguine cretus. Venus orta mari, mare.

Praestet eunti. Terra editus.

 

Of the Construction of Adverbs

Nominative

These demonstrative adverbs en and ecce are most frequently joined with the nominative, very rarely with the accusative.

En Priamus, sunt hic etiam sua praemia laudi.

Ecce tibi status noster. En quatuor aras.

Ecce duas tibi Daphni, duoque altaria Phoebo.

The en of reproach is only tied to the accusative, as en animum et mentem. En habitum.

 

Genitive

Some adverbs of place, time, and quantity, take the genitive after themselves.

 

Of Place

As ubi, ubinam, nusquam, eo, longe, quo, ubius, huccine, as ubi gentium? Quo terrarum abiit?

Nusquam loci invenitur. Eo impudentiae ventum est.

 

Of Time {n. p.}

As nunc, tunc, interea, pridie, postridie, as nihil tunc temporis amplius quam flere poteram.

Pridie eius diei pugnam inierunt.

Pridie calendarum, seu calendas.

 

Of Quantity

As parum, satis, abunde, etc.

Satis loquentiae, sapientiae parum.

Abunde fabularum audivimus.

Instar means comparison, measure, or similarity, as instar montis equum divina Palladis arte edificant.

Mittitur Philippus solus, in quo instar omnium auxiliorum erat.

Sed scelus hoc meriti pundus et instar habet.

Here the preposition ad is sometimes added, as vallis ad instar castrorum clauditur.

Populus Romanorum e parva origine, ad tantae magnitudinis instar emicuit.

Ah minime gentium, non faciam. Here the genitive is added for embellishment.

 

Dative

Some adverbs admit the noun from which they are derived in the dative, as venit obviam illi. Nam obvius illi dicitur.

Canit similiter huic, et sibi inutiliter vivit.

Propinquius tibi sedet quam mihi.

These datives are adverbials, tempori, luci, vesperi, as tempori venit, quod omnium rerum est primum.

Luci occidit hominem. Vidi ad vos afferri vesperi.

 

Accusative

There are some adverbs which admit the accusative case of the prepositions from which they are made, as castra propius urbem moventur. {R}

Proximem Hyspaniam sunt Mauri.

Cedo takes the accusative of the thing that demands to be exhibited, as cedo quemvis arbitrum.

 

Ablative

Adverbs related to diversity, aliter and secus, and these two ante and post, are often found with the ablative, as multo aliter, paulo secus, multo ante, longe secus.

Et longo post tempore venit, shortly after.

Adverbs at the comparative and superlative degree admit the case of the voice from which they are derived, as accessi propius illo. Optime omnium dixit.

Legimus propius ad deos, et propius a terris.

Plus is found to be added to the nominative, accusative, and ablative, as plus quinquaginta hominum ceciderunt.

Aberat acies paulo plus quingentos passus.

Dies triginta, aut plus eo, in navi fui.

 

Adverbs that Agree with Verbal Moods.

The adverbs of time ubi, postquam and quum are added sometimes to verbs in the indicative mood, and sometimes in the subjunctive, as haec ubi dicta dedit.

Ubi nos laverimus, si voles, lavato.

Quum faciam vitula, pro frugibus ipse venito.

Quum canerem reges et praelia, Cynthius aurem vellit.

 

Donec

When donec means quamdiu, it takes the indicative, as donec eram sospes. When it means quousque, it requires sometimes the indicative, sometimes the subjunctive, as cogere donec oves stabulis, numerumque iussit. Columella. Donec ea aqua, quam adieceris, decocta sit.

 

Dum

Dum, when it refers to an unfinished present thing or when it means quamdiu, {n. p.} takes the indicative mood, as dum apparatur virgo in conclavi.

Ego te meum dici tantisper volo: dum quod te dignum est, facis.

Dum, when it means dummodo, is joined toa potential or a subjunctive mood, as dum prosim tibi. Dum ne ab hoc me falli comperiam. When it means donec, it is only joined to the subjunctive, as tertia dum latio regnantem videri aestas.

 

Quoad

Quoad, when it means quamdiu, is followed by both the indicative and the subjunctive. When it means donec, only to subjunctive verbs, as quoad expectas contubernalem?

Quoad possem, et liceret, ab eius latere numquam discederem.

Omnia integra servabo, quoad exercitus huc mittatur.

 

Simulac etc

Simulac and simulat are followed by the indicative and subjunctive.

Simulac belli patiens erat.

Simulatque adoleverit aetas.

 

Quemadmodum etc

Quemadmodum, ut, utcunque, sicut admit both moods, as ut salutabis, ita et resalutaberis.

Ut sementem feceris, ita et metes.

Ut meaning postquam is followed by the indicative, as ut ventum est in urbem.

 

Quasi etc

Quasi, ceu, tamquam, perinde and si, but not secus and si, when they have a proper verb, are followed by a subjunctive, as tamquam feceris ipse aliquid.

Quasi non norimus nos inter nos.

Otherwise, they couple with similar cases, as novi hominem tamquam te. Arridet mihi quasi amico.

 

Ne

Ne related to prohibition is put before the imperative or subjunctive, {R. ii.} as ne saevi magna sacerdos.

Hic nebulo magnus est, ne metuas.

Ne meaning non serves other moods.

Adverbs with a case close to them are turned into prepositions, as cantabit vacuus coram latrone viator.

 

Of the Construction of Conjunctions

Copulative and disjunctive conjunctions with these four quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, usually connect similar cases; unless it is inconsistent with any specific rule of case construction, as Socrates docuit Xenophontem et Platonem.

Utinam calidus esses aut frigidus. Est minor natu quam tu. Nemini placet nisi, vel praeterquam sibi.

Emi librum centussi et pluris.

Vixi Romae et Venetiis.

Horace, in Meti descendat iudicis aures et patris et nostras.

Copulative and disjunctive conjunctions sometimes connect similar moods and tenses, as recto stat corpore, despicitque terras.

Nisi me lactasses amantem, et vana spe produceres.

Tibi gratias egi, et te aliquando collaudare possum.

 

Etsi etc

Etsi, tametsi, etiamsi, quanquam require the indicative mood at the beginning of a sentence , the subjunctive in the middle.

Quamvis and licet more frequently take the subjunctive, as etsi nihil novi afferebatur.

Quanquam animus meminisse horret.

Quamvis Elysios miretur Graecia campos.

Ipse licet venias Musis comitatus Homere.

 

Ni, nisi etc

Ni, nisi, si, siquidem, quod, quia, quam, postquam, posteaquam, ubi {n. p.} instead of postquam, nunquam, priusquam, are followed by both the indicative and the subjunctive, as quod redieris incolumis gaudeo.

Castigo te non quod odio habeam, sed quod amem.

Aliud honestum iudicas, quam philosophi statuant.

Gravius accusas, quam patitur tua consuetudo.

Si is joined to both moods but, when it means quamvis, it is only followed by the subjunctive, as redeam? Non, si me obsecret. Si quis only wants indicative, as si quis adest.

 

Quando etc

Quando, quandoquidem, quoniam are joined to the indicative, as dicite quandoquidem in molli consedimus herba.

Quoniam mihi non credis, ipse facito periculum.

 

Quippe

Quippe, when it has its own verb, takes the indicative, as danda est huic venia, quippe aegrotat.

If you add qui, it admits both moods, as non est huic danda venia, quippe qui iam bis peieravit or peieraverit.

 

Qui

When qui has the control of the case, it requires the subjunctive, as stultus es qui huic credas.

 

Cum

Cum, when it means quamvis, quandoquidem or quoniam, is always followed by the subjunctive, as nos cum praecipi nihil posse dicamus, tamen aliis de rebus disserere solemus.

Cum sis officiis Gradive virilibus aptus.

 

Cum, tum

Cum and tum, as well as tum repeated twice, are combined in similar ways.

Est autem in cum quiddam minus, in tum quiddam maius.

Amplectitur cum eruditos omnes, tum in primis Marcellum.

Odit tum litteras tum virtutem. {R. iii.}

 

Ne, an, num

The interrogative particles ne, an, num prefer the indicative, as ut superat ne et vestitur aura aetherea?

But when they are used to express doubt or in an infinitive, they require the subjunctive, as vise num redierit.

Nihil refert feceris ne, an persuaseris.

 

Ut

Ut as a conjunction to express cause or purpose, and ut meaning ne non, after verbs of fear, is joined either to the potential or to the subjunctive mood, as filium perduxere illuc secum, ut una esset meum. Te oro Dave ut redeam iam in viam. Metuo ut substet hospes. Concessive ut, and ut meaning utpote is followed by the subjunctive, as ut omnia contingant quae volo, levari non possum.

Non est tibi fidendum, ut qui toties fefelleris.

Ut qui solus relictus fueris.

Ut instead of postquam, quemadmodum or sicut, and interrogative ut is followed by the indicative, as ut ab urbe discesi, nullam intermisi diem, quin scriberem.

Tu tamen has nuptias perge facere, ut facis.

Credo, ut est dementia. Ut valet? Ut meminit nostri?

 

Of the Construction of Prepositions

An understood preposition sometimes causes an ablative to be added, as habeo te loco parentis. Apparvit illi humana facie. Discessit magistratu.

A preposition sometimes takes in a compound the same case that it took when it was not compounded, as nec posse Italia Teucrorum avertere regem.

Emoti procumbunt cardine postes.

Detrudunt naves scopulo.

Verbs compounded with a, ab, ad, con, de, e, ex, in sometimes require the same prepositions with their case when they are not {n. p.}compunded, as abstinuerunt a viris. Amicos advocabo ad hanc rem. Cum legibus conferemus.

Detrahere de tua fama nunquam cogitavi. Cum ex insidiis evaseris. Postquam excessit ex ephebis.

In rempublicam cogitatione curaque incumbe.

 

In

In, when it means erga, contra, and ad, takes the accusative case, as accipit in Teucros animum, mentemque benignam.

Quid meus Aeneas in te committere tantum, quid Troes potuere?

Quo te Meri pedes? An quo via ducit, in urbem?

Besides, in is joined to the accusative, every time it means division, alteration, or increase of something during time, as est locus in parteis, ubi se via findit in ambas.

Versa est in cineres sospite Troia viro.

Amor crescit in horas.

When in is related to actions in a place, it requires the ablative, as aurum in igni spectatur.

 

Sub

Sub, when it means ad, per and ante, is followed by the accusative, as sub umbram properemus. Legati fere sub id tempus, ad res repetendas missi, that is per id tempus.

Sub noctem cura recursat that is ante, or instante nocte.

It admits also the ablative, as quicquid sub terra est in apricum proferet aetas.

Sub nocte silenti, that is in nocte silenti.

 

Super

Super meaning ultra is joined to the accusative, as super Garamantas, et Indos proferet imperium.

When it means de and in, it is joined to the ablative, as multus super ea re, variusque rumor. Fronde super viridi.

 

Subter

In the ancient authors subter is joined to both cases with the same meaning, as pugnatum est super, subterque tetras. Vergil, {n. p.} omnes ferre libet subter densa testudine casus.

 

Tenus

Tenus takes the ablative case both singular and plural, as pube tenus. Pectoribus tenus, but the genitive only in the plural, as crurum tenus.

When prepositions take a case, they become adverbs, as longo post tempore venit.

Pone subit coniunx. Coram quem quaeritis adsum.

 

Of the Construction of Interjections

Interjections are often used absolutely and without a case.

Spem gregis ah silice in nuda connixa reliquit.

Quae malum dementia?

 

O

O as an exclamation is joined to the nominative, the accusative, and the vocative, as o sestus dies hominis.

O fortunatos nimium, bona si sua norint, agricolas.

O formose puer, nimium ne crede colori.

 

Heu, pro

Heu and pro are followed sometimes by the nominative and sometimes by the accusative.

Heu pietas. Heu prisca fides.

Heu stirpem invisam.

Pro Iupiter, tu homo adiges me ad insaniam.

Pro deum atque hominum fidem.

Pro sancte Iupiter. For Plautum.

 

Hei, veh

Hei and veh are added to the dative case, as hei mihi, quod nullis amor est medicabilis herbis.

Veh misero mihi, quanta de spe decidit? {n. p.}

 

Of Figures

A figure is a masterfully modified form of speech, only two kinds of which will be discussed here, that is, word figures and figures of speech .

 

Word Figures

 

 

prothesis

 

syncope

There are six word figures

 

aphaeresis

 

paragoge

 

 

epenthesis

 

apocope

 

The prothesis is the addition of a letter or syllable at the beginning of a word, as gnatus for natus. Tetuli for tuli.

Aphaeresis is the removal of a letter or syllable at the beginning of a word, as ruit pro eruit. Temnere pro contemnere.

Epenthesis is the addition of a letter or syllable in the middle of a word, as to relliquias, relligio, an l is added. Induperatorem for imperatorem.

Syncope is the removal of a letter or syllable in the middle of a word, as abiit, petiit, dixti, repostum, etc.

Paragoge is the addition of a letter or syllable at the end of a word, as dicier for dici.

Apocope is the removal of a letter or syllable at the end of a word, as peculi for peculii. Dixtin’ for dixtine. {S}

 

Construction Figures

There are eight construction figures

 

apposition

 

zeugma

 

evocation

 

synthesis

 

syllepsis

 

antiptosis

 

prolepsis

 

synecdoche

 

Apposition

An apposition is the combination of two nouns of the same case, one of which announces the other, as flumen Rhenus. An apposition can also be made of several nouns, as Marcus Tullius Cicero. Sometimes the authors put nouns in different cases, almost as if they were related to different nouns, as urbs Pataurii. Urbs Antiochiae.

In an apposition we do not always find nouns of the same gender or number, as urbs Athenae.

In me turba ruunt luxoriosa proci.

Ignavum fucos pecus a praesepibus arcent.

An apposition can be made by three kinds of denomination:

To specify something more general, as Urbs Roma. Animal equus.

To clear misunderstandings, as Taurus mons Asiae. Lupus piscis.

To attribute qualities, as Erasmus vir exactissimo iudicio. Nireus adolescens insigni forma. Timotheus homo incredibili fortuna.

 

Evocation

An evocation is when the third person is brought back continuatively to the first or second, as {n. p.} ego Cicero oro, vos auditores acclamatis.

It must be observed that the verb always agrees with the evoking person, as ego pauper laboro. Tu dives ludis.

In an evocation the evoking and evoked persons sometimes have a different number, either because the evoked person lacks the singular, as ego tuae delitiae istuc veniam? Or because it is a collective noun, as magna pars studiosorum amoenitates quaerimus, hic subauditur nos. Or finally when it is a distributive noun, as in magnis rebus laesus uterque sumus, subintelligitur nos.

An evocation can also be implicit, when the evoking person is understood, as sum pius Aeneas.

Populus superamur ab uno, subauditur nos.

 

Syllepsis

Syllepsis, or conceptio, is when we join a less preponderant element together with a more preponderant one, thanks to whose rule you will understand the following examples:

The sentence joint through the conjunctions et, nec, neque, and cum, meaning et, requires the received verb, adjective, or relative in the plural, because that verb, or adjective, or relative will agree in gender and person with the most preponderant noun, as quin tu et soror facitis?

Ego et mater miseri perimus.

Tu et uxor qui adfuistis, testes estote.

 

Syllepsis of Persons

The first person is more preponderant than the second or third, and the second is more preponderant than the third, as ego et pater sumus in tuto. {S. ii.}

Tu atque frater estis in periculo.

Neque ego neque tu sapimus.

Rhemo cum fratre Quirinus iura dabant.

However, cum prefers a singular verb, as tu quid ego et populus mecum desideret, audi.

 

Syllepsis of Genders

The masculine gender is more preponderant than the feminine or neuter ones, and the feminine is more preponderant that the neuter, as rex et regina beati.

Calibs et aurum sunt in fornace probati.

Per vim et leges sunt plebiscita coacta.

But when nouns mean inanimate things, the more common adjective or relative is put in the neuter gender, as cum Daphnidis arcum registi et calamos, quae tu perverse Menalca,

Et cum vidisti puero donata, dolebas.

Ira et aegritudo permista sunt.

Virga tua et baculus tuus, ipsa me consolata sunt.

There is also an implicit kind of syllepsis, as impliciti laqueis nudus uterque iacet.

Subaudi Mars et Venus.

 

Prolepsis

Prolepsis, or praesumptio, is a brief summary statement of matters. Moreover it takes place when the recapitulation – that is, the whole matter – is properly linked to the verb or the adjective, then some parts of the whole matter are connected back to that same verb or adjective, with which, however, they barely agree, as duae aquilae volaverunt, haec ab oriente, illa ab occidente. The recapitulation or whole matter is an expression of the plural number, as duae aquilae, or equivalent to the plural, as Corydon et Thyrsis. The copulative sentence is actually equivalent to the plural, as {n. p.} compulerantque greges, Corydon et Thyrsis in unum, Thyrsis oves, Corydon distentas lacte capellas .

The recapitulation is otherwise a collective noun, as populus vivit, alii in penuria, alii in deliciis.

Prolepsis can also be implicit, when something is not expressed, as alterius lactantes lumina vultus.

Deest alter in alterius.

Diomedes talks of prolepsis every time we anticipate something that is said later, as Lavinia venit littora. Lavinium enim nondum erat quum Aeneas veniret in Italiam.

Zeugma

Zeugma takes place when we bring back a single verb or adjective that usually agree with a closer element to different ones, agreeing with the former rightfully, with the latter to complete the number, as nihil te nocturnum praesidium palatii, nihil urbis vigiliae, nihil timor populi, nihil concursus bonorum, nihil hic munitissimus habendi senatus locus, nihil horum ora vultusque moverunt? Here moverunt is clearly brought back to ora vultusque, but it is connected to the rest to complete the number. We should actually understand praesidium movit, vigiliae moverunt, timor populi movit, bonorum concursus movit, habendi senatus locus movit.

However, when there is a comparison or similitude, the verb or the adjective agrees with the most distant word, as ego sicut fenum arui. Hoc ille ita prudenter atque ego, fecisset.

Also through nisi, as talem filium nulla nisi tu pareret.

It may be that sometimes poets are wont to speak differently, as nihil hic nisi carmina desunt.

Quid nisi secretae laeserunt Phyllida silvae?

Three kinds of zeugma can take place:

In person, as ego et tu studes. {S. iii.}

In gender, as maritus et uxor est irata.

In number, as hic illius arma, hic currus fuit.

Sometimes the verb or adjective is put at the beginning, and it is called protozeugma, as dormio ego et tu.

Sometimes in the middle, and it is called mesozeugma, as ego dormio et tu.

Sometimes at the end, and it is called hypozeugma, as ego et tu dormis.

 

Synthesis

Synthesis is a word that agrees according to its meaning and not to its grammatical voice, as pars in frusta secant. Gens armati.

However, sometimes synthesis is used regarding gender to distinguish this latter or the sex, as anser feta, elephantus gravida.

Or to complete, as Praeneste sub ipsa scilicet urbe.

Centauro in magna scilicet navi.

Sometimes only in number, as turba ruunt. Aperite aliquis ostium.

Other times indeed in both gender and number at the same time, as pars mersi tenuere ratem. Hic manus ob patriam pugnando vulnera passi.

 

Antiptosis

Antiptosis is the use of one case for another, and sometimes not without refinement, as urbem quam statuo vestra est.

Populo ut placerent quas fecisset fabulas.

Sermonem quem audistis, non est meus.

Eius non venit in mentem, instead of id.

Aristotelis libri sunt omne genus elegantiae referti pro omnis generis. So id genus, quod genus, etc. {n. p.}

Id ne estis authores mihi? Instead of eius.

However, sometimes there is a stronger antiptosis, as salve primus omnium parens patriae appellate, instead of prime.

Habet duos gladios, quibus altero te occisurum minatur, altero villicum.

 

Synecdoche

Synecdoche is when something that refers only to a part is attributed to a the whole, as Aethiops albus dentes.

Here ‘white’, which only applies to teeth, is attributed also to the Ethiopians.

By means of synecdoche adjective nouns that indicate a quality, as well as passive and neuter verbs that indicate a passion can take the accusative or the ablative of place which refers to that quality or passion, as aeger pedes or pedibus.

Saucius frontem or fronte.

Doleo caput or capite.

Redimitus tempora lauro.

Truncatus membra bipenni.

Effusas laniata comas, contusaque pectus.

In fact, these are Greek sentences.

Excepto quod non simul esses, cetera laetus.

Cetera similes, uno differunt.

 

If there is anyone who wants to learn about such elegant choices in the construction of figures, he should read Thomas Linacre who discusses clearly and at length about ellipsis, pleonasm, and enallage.

{n. p.}

 

Of Prosody

Prosody teaches the right pronunciation of words.

It is called accentus in Latin.

 

 

accent

But prosody is divided in

 

breathing

 

 

prosodic time

The accent follows a rule whereby a syllable is raised or lowered in the sentence.

 

 

acute

There are three kinds of accent

 

grave

 

 

circumflex

The acute accent is an oblique mark rising towards the right, like ´ .

The grave accent is an oblique mark lowering towards the right, like ` .

The circumflex accent is somehow composed of both, like ^ .

We should also add the apostrophe, which a sort of semicircle put after a letter on top, like ’.

it is clear that the last vowel of the word is missing due to this mark, as tanton’ me crimine dignum dixisti? Pro tanto ne.

 

There are two kinds of breathing

 

rough

 

 

smooth

Rough breathing, whereby the syllable is uttered with aspiration, as homo, honor.

Smooth breathing, whereby the syllable is uttered without an aspiration, as amo, onus.

 

Rules of the Accents

First

A monosyllabic word is short and it takes an acute accent when it is in a long position, as mél, fél, párs, páx, or takes a circumflex accent when it is long by nature, as spês, flôs, sôl, thûs, rûs. {n. p.}

 

Second

In a disyllabic word, if the first syllable is long and the second is short, the first syllable takes a circumflex accent, as lûna, mûsa.

In the other cases, they have an acute accent, as cítus, látus, sólers.

 

Third

A polysyllabic word, if the second last syllable is long, takes an acute accent on that syllable, as libértas, penátes. But if the second last syllable is short, the acute accent falls on the third last one, as dóminus, póntifex.

Compounds of facio make an exception, for they have an acute accent on the second last syllable, as benefácis, malefácis, calefácit, frigefácit,

But if the second last syllable is long and the last one is short, the second last syllable has a circumflex accent, as Românus, amâtor.

Compounds of fis and fit have an acute accent on the last syllable, as madefís, calefít, benefít, satisfít.

 

Appendix

Because nowadays, due to general ignorance, the circumflex accent is barely distinguished from the acute one in its extension, grammarians confused the circumflex with the acute.

 

Fourth

There are five things that break the rules of accents.

 

Distinction

Distinction moves the accent, as the adverb uná has an acute accent on the last letter, so that it is not mistaken for a noun. Thus eó, aliquó, alió, continuó, seduló, porró, forté, quá, siquá, aliquá, nequá, illó, falsó, citó, feré, plané, and others of this kind, putá meaning sicut, poné, corám, circmúm, aliás, palám, ergó when it is a conjunction but, when ergô expresses the cause of something, it has a circumflex accent, as illius ergô venimus.

Thus, because of distinction, the third to last syllable is suspended in these words déinde, próinde, périnde, alíquando, síquando, néquamdo, {T} húccusque, álonge, délonge, déinceps, dúntaxat, déorsum, quápropter, quínimmo, enímvero, propémodum, ádmodum, áffabre, intereáloci, nihilóminus, paulóminus, when they are not of other declensions, as instead are púbe, ténus, crúrum, ténus, and when they are not compounds, like háctenus, quátenus, and others of this kind.

 

Transposition

Transposition reverses the accent. This is what happens in prepositions, which take a grave accent when they are put after, as transtra per et remos. Te penes imperium.

 

Attraction

Attraction changes the accent, when a conjunction inclinativa, i.e. used to decline, follows some nouns, as que, ne, ve.

In fact these particles attract the accent to the preceding syllables, which take an acute one, as lumináque laurúsque dei.

But where there is an evident composition, the accent does not change, as dénique, útique, ítaque, úndique, híccine, and huiusmodi, yet ubíque keeps the accent of his prosodic time.

 

Truncation

Truncation shifts the accent when words are cut through syncope or apocope. Then, in fact, they keep the accent of the uncut word, as Vergíli, Valéri, Mercúri.

Likewise, some syncopated nouns and pronouns take a circumflex accent on the last syllable, as Arpinâs, Ravennâs, nostrâs, vestrâs, cuiâs, from the previous words Ravennâtis, nostrâtis, etc.

And so do donêc from donecum; hûc, illûc, istûc, adhûc, etc., instead of hûcce, illûcce etc.; and compounds from dîc, dûc, fâc, as benedîc, redúc, calefác. {n. p.}

 

Idiom

An idiom is a characteristic of a language: it changes the accent when Greek words, if they have come to us uncut, preserve their accent, as simóis, períphas that take an acute accent on the second to last syllable. On the contrary, when they are turned into Latin words, the accent falls on the third to last syllable, because they abbreviate the second to last one. However, they actually become Latin words and preserve the Latin accent, as georgica, bucolica, which have an acute accent on the third to last syllable in Greek but here have it on the last one.

Likewise, comoedia, tragoedia, sophia, symphonia take the accent on the third to last syllable, although they had it on the second to last in their language.

Moreover, if we do not know the proper accent of a foreign word, it would be much safer to utter it according to the Latin accent.

Common syllables in a prose speech are always abbreviated, as célebris, cáthedra, medíocris.

 

Of the Structure of Verse

So far I have discussed accents and breathings, now I will add a few things on the prosodic time of syllables and on the structure of verses.

Prosodic time is the measure of the pronunciation of a syllable.

A short syllable has one time, but a long one has two.

Short time is marked like this .

While the long like this , as tērră .

Feet are made of syllables distributed in the right order.

And a foot is the arrangement of two or more syllables according to a specific structure of prosodic times.

Feet can be either disyllable or trisyllable.

However, to discuss tetrasyllables is not very relevant to our purpose. {T. ii.}

 

 

 

spondee

 

⎯ ⎯

vīrtūs

Disyllables are

 

pyrrhic

as

◡ ◡

dĕŭs

 

 

trochee

 

⎯ ◡

pānĭs

 

 

iambus

 

◡ ⎯

ămās

 

 

 

molossus

 

⎯ ⎯ ⎯

māgnātēs

 

 

tribrach

 

◡ ◡ ◡

dŏmĭnŭs

 

 

dactyl

 

⎯ ◡ ◡

scrībĕrĕ

There are eight trisyllables

 

anapaest

as

◡ ◡ ⎯

pĭĕtās

 

 

bacchius

 

◡ ⎯ ⎯

hŏnēstās

 

 

antibacchius

 

⎯ ⎯ ◡

aūdīrĕ

 

 

amphimacer

 

⎯ ◡ ⎯

chārĭtās

 

 

amphibrach

 

◡ ⎯ ◡

vĕnīrĕ

 

Moreover, feet arranged in the right number and order make a verse.

In fact, a verse is an utterance composed of the right number of feet. In order to compose a verse, we must learn first of all to distribute feet properly, that is, what they call scansion.

Scansion also refers to the proper symmetry of the verses in each foot.

A scansion can also have synaloepha, eclipsis, synaeresis, diaeresis and caesura.

 

Synaloepha

A synaloepha is the elision of a vowel before another one in two different words, as sera nimis vit’ est crastina, viu’ hodie, and sometimes a single word is created, as

 

 

dii

 

deinde

 

semiustus

 

 

 

diis

 

deinceps

 

deest

 

 

 

iidem

 

semianimis

 

deerat

 

and similar ones

 

iisdem

 

semihomo

 

deerit

 

 

But heu and ô are never cut. {n. p.}

 

Eclipsis

An eclipsis occurs every time the letter m is suppressed alongside its vowel, if the following word begins with another vowel, as monstr’ horren’ inform’ ingens, cui lumen ademptum.

 

Synaeresis

A synaeresis is the contraction of two syllables into one, as seu lento fuerint alvearia vimine texta.

 

Diaeresis

A diaeresis is when a syllable is divided and two are made from it, as debuerant fusos evolüisse suos.

 

Caesura

A caesura is when, after an absolute foot, a short syllable at the end of a word is extended.

Its kinds are:

Trihemimer, consisting of a foot and a syllable, as pectoribus inhians spirantia consula exta.

Penthemimer, consisting of two feet and a syllable, as omnia vincit amor, et nos cedamus amori.

Hephthemimer, consisting of three feet and a syllable, as ostentans artem pariter, arcumque sonantem.

Eneemimer, consisting of four feet and a syllable, as ille latus niveum molli fultus, hyacinto.

 

Of the Types of Verses

The types of verses we decided to mainly discuss here are: heroic, elegiac, asclepiad, sapphic, phaleuciac, iambic.

 

Heroic Verse

A heroic verse, which is also called hexameter, consists of six feet in number, but of two types, dactyl and spondee. The fifth foot requires exclusively a dactyl, {T. iii.} the sixth a spondee; the other feet one or the other as we wish, as Tītȳrĕ tū pătŭlæ̆ rĕcŭbāns sūb tēgmĭnĕ sāgī.

Sometimes a spondee is also found in the fifth foot, as clara deûm soboles magnum Iovis incrementum.

The last syllable of every verse is not changed.

 

Elegiac Verse

An elegiac verse, which is also called pentameter, consists of two penthemimers, the first of which comprehends two dactyl, spondee or alternate feet with a long syllable; the latter has two feet as well, but both dactyls with a long syllable, as rēs ēst sōllĭcĭtū plēnă tĭmōrĭs ămor.

 

Asclepiad Verse

An asclepiad verse consists of a penthemimer – that is, of a spondee. a dactyl and a long syllable – and then two dactyls, as Mēcoēnās ătăvīs ēdĭtĕ rēgĭbŭs.

 

Sapphic Verse

A sapphic verse consists of a trochee, a spondee, a dactyl, and two half trochees, as iām sătīs tērrīs nĭvĭs ātquĕ dīrae.

Nevertheless, in this type of verse, after three verses we add an adonic, which consists of a dactyl and a spondee, as integer vitae, scelerisque purus non eget Mauri iaculis, nec arcu, nec venenatis gravida sagittis fūscĕ phărētra.

 

Phaleuciac or Hendecasyllable Verse

A phaleuciac or hendecasyllable verse consists of {n. p.} a spondee, a dactyl, and thenthree trochees, as quōqūò dīffŭgĭās păvēns Măbīlĭ, nostrum non poteris latere nasum.

 

Archilochian Iambic Verse

A right iambic verse only consists of iambi, as sŭis ĕt īpsă Rōmă vīrĭbūs rŭīt.

Nevertheless, it sometimes takes in odd feet a tribrach, a spondee, a dactyl or an anapaest instead of a iambus, and in even feet a tribrach and more rarely a spondee.

This verse is divided in two types, dimeter and trimeter or senarius.

 

Dimeter

A dimeter consists of four feet, as ō cārmĭnūm dūlcēs nŏtae, quas ore pulchra melleo fundis, lyraeque succinis.

 

Trimter or senarius

A trimeter consists of six feet, as qūi nōs dāmnānt, sūnt hīstrĭōnēs māxĭmī.

Nam Curios simulant, vivunt Bacchanalia.

 

Of the Length of Initial Syllables

The length of initial syllables follows seven parameters.

 

 

position

 

composition

 

vowel before vowel

 

preposition

 

diphthong

 

rule

 

derivation

 

 

{n. p.}

 

Position

A vowel before two consonants or a double consonant in the same word is long in any position, as ventus, axis, patrizo.

If a consonant ends the word before and the following word also begins with a consonant, the preceding vowel will also be in a long position, as maior sum quam cui possit fortuna nocere.

The syllables ior, sum, sit, are in a long position.

But if the previous word ends with a short vowel and the following begins with two consonants, sometimes but quite rarely it is extended, as occulta spolia, et plures de pace triumphos.

A short vowel before a mute and with a following liquid is made into a common, as patris, volucris.

But long vowels are not changed, as aratrum, simulacrum.

 

A Vowel before Another

A vowel before another in the same word is always short, as Deus, praeamplus.

Genitives in ius as unius, illius, etc. where an i is commonly found make an exception, although it is always short in alterius.

We must also exclude the genitives and accusatives of the fifth declension, for an e between two i is long, as faciei, which otherwise does not happen, as rei, spei, fidei.

Fi in fio is also long, unless after the e follows an r, as fierem, fieri. Juvenal, sic fiunt octo mariti. Idem. Quod fieri non posse putes.

The interjection ohe has a palindromic first syllable.

A vowel before another in Greek words often becomes long, as dicite Pierides. Respice Laerten. And in possessives, as Aeneia nutrix. Rhodopeius Orpheus. {n. p.}

 

Diphthong

Every diphthong is long for the Latins, as aurum, neuter, musae, unless it follows a vowel, as praeire.

 

Derivation

Derivatives share the same length as primitives, as amator, amicus, amabilis, with a short first syllable from amo.

Nevertheless, there are a few exceptions of syllable that are derived from short ones but still extend their initial syllable. Some types are

 

vox, vocis from voco

 

iucundus from iuvo

 

lex, legis from lego

 

iunior from iuvenis

 

rex, regis from rego

 

mobilis from moveo

 

sedes from sedeo

 

humanus from homo

 

iumentum from iuvo

 

vomer from vomo

 

fomes and fomentum from foveo

 

pedor from pede

On the contrary, there are some which are derived from long syllables but ake a short one, as

 

dux, ducis from duco

 

genui from gigno

 

dicax, maledicus

 

fragor

from frango

 

and this kind from dico

 

fragilis

 

 

fides from fio

 

noto, notas from notu

 

arena

from areo

 

nato, natas from natu

 

arista

 

 

disertus from dissero

 

posui from pono

 

sopor from sopio

And some others of both kinds that are left to scholars to be observed in their readings.

 

Composition

Compound words follow the length of simple words, as

 

potens

 

impŏtens

 

lego, legis

 

perlĕgo

 

 

solor

 

consôlor

 

lego, legas

 

allêgo

 

Nevertheless, these short words derived from the long ones make an exception

 

innuba

 

from nubo

 

deiero and

 

from iuro

 

 

pronuba

 

 

 

peiero

 

 

 

And if there are others of this kind. {U}

 

Preposition

Among the prepositions, these are always extended a, e, de, prae, se, unless when there is a following vowel, as unda dehiscens.

And sudibus praeustis for Vergil. Also pro is long except in these,

 

procella

 

profiteor

 

profugus

 

profundus

 

protervus

 

proficiscor

 

pronepos

 

profari

 

propago pro stirpe

 

propero

 

prophanus

 

profugio

 

 

 

profecto

 

procuro

 

propulso

 

profundo

 

propago, propagas

 

propello

 

 

Have an uncertain first syllable

Propheta and propino are Greek words for the short o and therefore have a short first syllable.

 

Also di is extended, except in dirimo and disertus.

 

The other prepositions are abbreviated if it their position allows it. They are of this kind

 

ad

 

 

sub

 

 

ob

 

 

re

 

 

ab

 

 

in

 

etc.

 

Rule

Every disyllabic past tense has a long initial syllable, as legi, emi.

 

 

fidi

 

 

scidi

 

Exceptions

 

bibi

 

 

steti

 

 

 

dedi

 

 

tuli

 

Likewise, past tenses with a repeated syllable have a short first syllable, as {n. p.}

 

pependi

 

pepedi

 

pupugi

 

tetendi

 

tutudi

 

didici

 

totondi

 

fefelli

 

cecǐdi from cado

 

momordi

 

tetigi

 

cecîdi from cedo

And in fact, a disyllabic supine likewise has a long first syllable, as

 

motum

 

 

 

quitum

 

rutum

 

latum

 

except

 

situm

 

ratum

 

lotum

 

 

 

litum

 

datum

 

cretum

 

 

 

itum

 

satum

And also citum from cieo, cies, because citum from cio, cis of the fourth conjugation has a long first syllable. Here pupils should learn to observe the usual lengths of the first syllables according to the poets, whose sorts are

 

Britannus

 

Criticus

 

Hymen

 

 

 

Bithynus

 

Curetes

 

Italus

 

 

 

Cacus

 

Diana

 

Liquor

 

 

 

Cosyra

 

Fidenae

 

Liquidus

 

 

 

Crathis

 

Gradivus

 

Lycas

 

and similar words

 

Pachinus

 

Hinulus

 

Orion

 

 

 

Palatium

 

Pyrene

 

Rudo

 

 

 

Pelion

 

Rubigo

 

Sychaeus

 

 

 

 

 

Rutilius

 

Sicanus

 

 

 

Of the Middle Syllables

Middle syllables can be learned partly through the same rules of the first syllables, and partly also through the lengthening caused by the genitive case, and through the rule of conjugation.

We think that the lengthening caused by the genitive of polysyllabic nouns has already been discussed enough in the section on the genders of nouns, which you may refer to if you have any doubts about this subject. A constant reading and study of the best learned poets will easily supply the rest.

Pupils learned the rule of conjugation from the rudiments they have assimilated, {U. ii.} that is: a long a is in itself a sign of the first conjugation, except in the verb do and its compounds when they are of this conjugation, as

 

dămus

 

dăbis

 

circundămus

 

circundăbis etc.

Besides, they learned that the syllables rimus and ritis in the preterperfect tense of the subjunctive mood must always be taken as short syllables, whereas in the future they must be long in a prose speech, but in poetry both short and long ones are found, as Aldus claims,

preterperfect

 

amavérimus

 

future

 

amaverîmus

 

 

amavéritis

 

 

 

amaverîtis

Moreover, middle syllables change in the poets’ writings, as these which we have added

 

connūbium or

Malêa

or

 

Malĕa

 

 

connŭbium

Bathâvus

 

Bathăvus

 

 

ficēdula

Pharsālia

Sidōnius

and similar ones

 

ficĕdula

Pharsălia

Sidŏnius

 

Latin adjectives in inus extend the second to last syllable, as

 

 

clandestinus

matutinus

 

 

mediastinus

vespertinus

 

 

parietinus

repentinus

 

diutinus

serotinus

 

 

 

crastinus

oleaginus

 

 

except the following

pristinus

faginus

 

 

 

perendinus

cedrinus

 

 

 

ornotinus

carbasinus

 

 

And likewise nouns in ινοσ derived from Greek, as

 

cristallinus

 

hyacintinus

 

etc.

 

myrrhinus

 

adamantinus

 

 

Practice will teach you all the rest in a more profitable way than the rules of grammarians, who are wont to discuss the length of middle syllables without any purpose. Therefore, leaving these aside, we are {n. p.} now ready to discuss final syllables.

 

Of the Final Syllables

Since the final syllables are equal to or exceed the number of the letters themselves, we do not deem it unnecessary to review them in order.

 

A

First, words ending in a are extended, as

 

ama

 

 

 

puta

 

contra

 

except

 

ita

 

erga

 

 

 

quia

And also nominatives, accusatives, and vocatives in a, whatever gender, number, and declension they might be, except the vocatives in a from Greek words in as, as o Aenea, o Thoma.

Numerals in ginta have a common final syllable, but more frequently a long one, as triginta, quadraginta.

 

B, D, T

Words ending in b, d, t are short, as ab, ad, caput.

 

E

Words ending in e are short, as

 

mare

 

lege

 

pene

 

scribe

All the words of the fifth declension ending in e make an exception, as die, fide, together with the adverbs coming from them, as

 

hodie

 

quare

 

quotidie

 

quadere

 

pridie

 

eare

 

postridie

 

and similar

And also the second person singular of the active imperatives of the second conjugation, as

 

doce

 

mane

 

move

 

cave

{U. iii.}

Monosyllables ending in e are extended as well, as

 

me

 

 

que

 

 

te

except

 

ve

enclitic conjugations

 

se

 

 

ne

 

Moreover, also adverbs ending in e that come from adjectives are long

 

 

docte

 

 

as

 

pulchre

to which are added

 

ferme

 

 

valde instead of valide

 

fere

Also bene and male are extended.

Finally, words written with ϰ by the Greeks are extended by nature, whatever be their case, gender, or number

as

 

Lethe

 

cete

 

 

Anchise

 

Tempe

 

I

Words ending in I are long, as

 

 

domini

 

amari

 

 

magistri

 

doceri

 

 

mihi

 

ubi

except

 

tibi

 

ibi which are common

 

 

sibi

 

 

 

However, nisi and quasi are abbreviated. Greek datives and vocatives, whose genitive singular ends in a short os, are of the same sort, as

 

 

Palladi

 

Amarylli

these

 

Phyllidi

 

 

Alexi

 

 

Minoidi

 

Daphni

 

L

Words ending in l are abbreviated, as

 

animal

 

mugil

 

Hannibal

 

sol

 

mel

 

consul

Except nil contracted from nihil. And certain foreign nouns in el, as {n. p.}

 

Michael

 

Raphael

 

Gabriel

 

Daniel

 

N

Words ending in n are extended, as

 

Paean

 

Xenophon

 

 

Hymen

 

non

 

 

quin

 

daemon

 

 

 

Forsan

 

tamen

except

 

forsitan

 

attamen

 

 

an

 

verumtamen etc.

Also word in in are abbreviated, as well as their compounds, as

 

exin

 

dein

 

subin

 

proin

The words that are cut through apocope must also be added to them, as

 

men’

 

audin’

 

viden’

 

nemon’

Also nouns in en, whose genitive in inis becomes abbreviated, as

 

carmen

 

pecten

 

crimen

 

tibicen

Also Greek words in on with short o, whatever be their case, as

nominative

 

Ilion

accusative

 

Caucason

 

 

Pelion

 

 

Pylon

Also some nouns in in, as Alexin, in yn, as Ityn, and in an from the nominative in a, as

nominative

 

Iphigenia

accusative

 

Iphigenian

 

 

Aegina

 

 

Aeginan

Nouns in an from nominatives in as are abbreviated, as

nominative

 

Aeneas

accusative

 

Aenean

 

 

Marsyas

 

 

Marsyan

 

O

Words ending in o are common, as {n. p.}

 

amo

 

porro

 

virgo

 

legendo, gerundium

Except the oblique cases in o, which are always extended, as

this

 

domino

from this

 

templo

 

 

servo

 

 

damno

And adverbs derived from nouns, as

 

tanto

 

liquido

primo

 

 

quanto

 

falso

manifesto etc.

 

except

 

sedulo

 

crebro

which are common

 

 

mutuo

 

sero

 

Moreover, modo and quomodo are always abbreviated.

Also cito, ut and ambo, duo, and homo, are barely found in extended form.

Monosyllables in o are also extended, as do, sto, and also ergô to express cause.

And also Greek nouns in ω, whatever be their case, as

these

 

Sappho

of this

 

Androgeo

this

 

Atho

 

 

Dido

 

 

Apollo

 

 

Apollo

 

R

Words ending in r are abbreviated, as

 

Caesar

 

vir

 

torcular

 

uxor

 

per

 

turtur

Cor is found in extended form in Ovid, as molle meum levibus cor est violabile telis.

 

 

far

 

ver

These are also extended

 

lar

 

fur

 

 

nar

 

cur

 

 

compar

 

also par with its compounds, as

 

impar

 

 

 

dispar

 

Also certain Greek nouns in er, which end in ϰρ, as {n. p.}

 

aer

 

character

 

crater

 

aether

 

stater

 

Soter

Except pater and mater, which for the Latins have a short last syllable.

 

S

Words ending in s with a vowel have the same ending, like

 

as

 

 

 

es

 

os

 

is

 

us

 

As

First of all, words ending in as are extended, as

 

amas

 

maiestas

 

Musas

 

bonitas

except Greek nouns, whose genitive singular ends in dos, as

 

Archas

genitive

 

Archados

 

Pallas

 

Pallados

and except plural accusatives of derived nouns , as

 

Heros

Heroos

accusative plural

 

Heroas

 

Phyllis

Phyllidos

 

 

Phyllidas

 

Es

Words ending in es are long, as

 

Anchises

 

doces

 

sedes

 

patres

Except nouns in es of the third declension, which abbreviate the second to last syllable of the derived genitive, as

 

miles

 

dives

 

seges

 

praepes

 

aries

 

ceres

 

abies

 

pes, with compounds

 

paries

 

 

also es from sum and its compounds are abbreviated, whatever be their mood, as {n. p.}

 

potes

 

prodes

 

ades

 

obes

Penes can be added to them, together with the plural and neuter nominatives of Greek words, as

 

Hippomanes

 

Cyclopes

 

Cacoethes

 

Naides

 

Is

Words ending in is are short, as

 

paris

 

tristis

 

panis

 

hilaris

Except the plurals of the oblique cases in is, which are extended, as

 

Musis

 

dominis

 

mensis

 

templis

Also quis instead of quibus, with words extending the second to last syllable of the derived genitive case, as

 

Samnis

 

Samnitis

 

Salamis

 

Salaminis

Add also the Latin or Greek words ending in the diphthong eis, whatever be their numbers or cases, as

 

Simoeis

 

parteis

 

Pyroeis

 

omneis

And also all monosyllables, as vis, lis, except the nominatives is and quis, and bis for Ovid.

Add to these the second persons singular of verbs in is, whose second persons plural end in îtis, the second to last syllable being extended, together with the future tenses of the subjunctive in ris, as

 

audis

 

 

audîtis

 

velis

plural

 

velîtis

 

dederis

 

 

dederîtis

 

Os

Words ending in os are extended, as

 

honos

 

dominos

 

nepos

 

servos

Except compos, impos, and os, osis, and Greek words ending in short o, {n. p.} as

 

Delos

 

Pallados

 

Chaos

 

Phyllidos

 

Us

Words ending in us are abbreviated, as

 

famulus

 

tempus

 

regius

 

amamus

The words extending the second to last syllable of the derived genitive make an exception, as

 

Salus

genitive

 

Salûtis

 

Tellus

 

Tellûris

All the words of the fourth declension in us are also long, except the singular nominative and vocative cases, as huius, hae, has; o manus.

Also add to these monosyllables, as

 

crus

 

mus

 

thus

 

sus etc.

And also Greek words ending in the diphthong us, whatever be their case, as

this

 

Panthus

of this

 

Sapphus

 

 

Melampus

 

 

Clius

And the name Iesus that is to be worshipped by all devout people.

 

U

Finally, all the words ending in u are extended, as

 

manu

 

amatu

 

genu

 

diu

 

The End.

Εάν ἦσ φιλομαθήσ ἔσῃ πολυμαθήσ {n. p.}

 

London

From the printing house of Thomas Berthelet. With exclusive privilege for printing. Year of the incarnate word 1542

Editorial notes

The next two pages, until page {D. i.}, are missing in the 1542 edition. They have been entirely taken from the 1543 edition.

Editorial notes

The next two pages, until page [E], are missing in the 1542 edition. They have been entirely taken from the 1543 edition.

Editorial notes

Some pages of the volume have been omitted in this edition (folios [I. i.], [I. ii], [I. iii.] repeated twice, and two following pages not numbered): the poem Guilielmi Lilii ad suos iscipulos monita pedagogica, seu carmen de moribus, containing some advice for the children who are going to learn grammar with this book, and Erasmus’ Christiani Hominis Institutum, a collection of Christian precepts, a description of the seven sacraments, of the sins and virtues to be pursued by the Christian man, or children to become men.

Glosses

The slanderers of grammar.

Editorial notes

This epigram, In Grammaticum (61), can be found in a collection of 71 poems called Epigrammata Bobiensa and written between the fourth and fifth century AD in a pagan literary environment gravitating towards Symmachus and Ausonius. The original manuscript was found at the end of the fifteenth century in Italy, in the Bobbio Abbey, Piacenza, but it disappeared until the twentieth century. Due to the delicacy and refinement of style, together with the lack of excessively polemic tones, it seems to be a set of cultured rhetorical exercises. Nevertheless, it subtly emerges the controversy on the role of the grammarian, which was especially addressed to the Alexandrine school.

Editorial notes

This epigram, In Grammaticum (61), can be found in a collection of 71 poems called Epigrammata Bobiensa and written between the fourth and fifth century AD in a pagan literary environment gravitating towards Symmachus and Ausonius. The original manuscript was found at the end of the fifteenth century in Italy, in the Bobbio Abbey, Piacenza, but it disappeared until the twentieth century. Due to the delicacy and refinement of style, together with the lack of excessively polemic tones, it seems to be a set of cultured rhetorical exercises. Nevertheless, it subtly emerges the controversy on the role of the grammarian, which was especially addressed to the Alexandrine school.

Glosses

The praise of grammar.

Editorial notes

Quintilian, Institutio oratoria I.IV.II. This and all the following quotes, unless otherwise specified, are taken from the online database The Latin Library. Not all Lily’s quotes have been found. In The Latin Library edition we can read “plus habet in recessu quam fronte promittit” cfr. here “plus habere in recessus quam prima fronte promittat”. Here and in some other quotes, unless otherwise specified, it has been suggested in quotation marks the sentence as it can be found in The Latin Library.

Editorial notes

The Latin word ‘comes’ could mean “companion, partner” but also “Count/ Earl/ occupant of any state office”.

Editorial notes

The whole Latin sentence, “grammatica necessaria pueris, iucunda senibus, dulcis secretorum [A. ii.] comes, et quae vel sola ex omni studiorum genere plus habet operis quam ostentationis”, comes from Quintilian, Institutio Oratoria, I.IV.V.

Editorial notes

The term “Sychophant” comes from the Greek sŷcon, ‘fig’, plus phaínein, ‘to show or reveal’, and refers to a servile flatterer, a parasite, a cheater. The word, together with other nicknames such as “Zoilus” or “Momus”, was often used as an insult in some literary quarrels to refer to some intellectuals, described as unpleasant, overbearing, coward, who copiously wrote and acted against theatre, poetry, and translations.

Editorial notes

Lily refers to Marcus Fabius Quintilianus or Quintilian, Roman teacher, rhetor and educator, whose Institutio Oratoria (Ist century AC) is one of the milestones of rhetoric and grammar, being a compendium of knowledge meant to instruct and educate the orator. Nevertheless, it is one of the most frequently quoted classical books, both directly and indirectly, in this Lily’s Grammar.

Glosses

Also the King cares for grammar.

Glosses

The king’s wisdom.

Glosses

Since there has been a proclaim so as to have only one grammar.

Glosses

Meaning of the proclaim.

Glosses

Anyone handling this treatise.

Editorial notes

It means “A praise to the King”. The term βασιλέοσ, Greek word for Basileus, could refer to a king, an emperor, a monarch, or the head of a Church. It was used for great personalities such as Alexander the Great.

Glosses

Any happy state.

Editorial notes

Here Lily is probably referring to Plato’s ideal state as described in the Republic.

Glosses

The praise of the King.

Glosses

The happiness of Anglia.

Glosses

The King favors letters.

Editorial notes

The two Latin words “Romana tirannis” are not legible in the 1542 edition; they have been taken from the 1546 edition.

Glosses

The vows of the pupils for the King.

Editorial notes

This Greek sentence means “God save the King”.

Editorial notes

Here we chose to keep the word coelum as it is the example for the diphthong oe, but in the remaining examples (where it has not been translated) we chose to modernize the spelling in caelum.

Editorial notes

We chose to keep here the sign ę, widely used in times past and very much in this grammar, instead of the modernized diphthong ae for both words, musę and pręsunt, to make clear Lily’s orthographical differences in the example.

Editorial notes

We chose to keep here the sign ę, widely used in times past and very much in this grammar, instead of the modernized diphthong ae for both words, musę and pręsunt, to make clear Lily’s orthographical differences in the example.

Editorial notes

In this passage Lily refers to Cicero, Pro Cn. Plancio Oratio, XXV.62: “virtus, probitas, integritas in candidato, non linguae volubilitas, non ars, non scientia requiri solet”. “What is usually required in a candidate is virtue, and honesty, and integrity, not volubility of tongue”.

Editorial notes

A satisfying explanation for the following gramatical terms except lambdacismus can be found in the 1677 book by Elisha Coles, An English dictionary explaining the difficult terms that are used in divinity, husbandry, physick, phylosophy, law, navigation, mathematicks, and other arts and sciences : containing many thousands of hard words, and proper names of places, more than are in any other English dictionary or expositor : together with the etymological derivation of them from their proper fountains, whether Hebrew, Greek, Latin, French, or any other language : in a method more comprehensive than any that is extant, London: Printed for Peter Parker, 1677. Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership, 2011. Here we can read for iotacismus “a frequent beginning with the letter I; also a fault in pronouncing it too broad. All (but Englishmen) pronounce it ee”.

Editorial notes

Ibid. “Traulismus, g. a stammering”.

Editorial notes

Ibid. “Plateasm, g. a speaking over-broad”.

Editorial notes

Ibid. “Ischnotes, g. a slender, childish or Foeminine pronunciation”.

Editorial notes

Another reference to Quintilian.

Editorial notes

Ennius, Annales, VIII.258-9.

Editorial notes

Ennius, Annales, VIII.258-9.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoriae, III.65-6. In the Latin Library edition we can read “labitur” instead of “praeterit”.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoriae, III.65-6. In the Latin Library edition we can read “labitur” instead of “praeterit”.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae. III.76.

Editorial notes

Ibid. v.78.

Editorial notes

Lily is referring to the colon.

Editorial notes

Erasmus, Parabolae Sive Similia, 1514. Quoted in Tilley, Morris Palmer. Elizabethan Proverb Lore in Lyly's Euphues and in Pettie's Petite Pallace: With Parallels from Shakespeare. Vol. 2. Macmillan, 1926, p. 122.

Editorial notes

Horace, Ars Poetica, vv. 141-142.

Editorial notes

Horace, Ars Poetica, vv. 141-142.

Editorial notes

This quote comes from the Doctrinale Puerorum of Alexander de Villa Dei, 1199, vv. 2539-40. Different manuiscripts of this Medieval educational book to teach Latin grammar in schools and universities can be found in the XVth century England.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogues, I.26.

Editorial notes

It is a synonym for “etymology”. Cicero used this word in Topica, 35 “Ea est autem, cum ex vi nominis argumentum elicitur; quam Graeci ἐτυμολογίαν appellant, id est verbum ex verbo veriloquium”.

Editorial notes

The definition of “accidentibus” given by Rita Copeland and Ineke Sluiter is: “The features or properties of a part of speech are calleda ccidentia. They are “what happens to” (accidit) the word”. This definition refers to the use of the word “accidunt” by Aelius Donatus in his grammar book Ars Minor, CA 350: “What is a noun? A part of speech with case signifying a body or a thing as a proper name [uniquely] or as a common name [generally]. How many accidentia does the noun have? Six. Which ones? Quality, comparison, gender, number, figure, case.”, Medieval Grammar and Rhetoric: Language arts and literary theory, AD 200–1475, Oxford, OUP, 2009, p.87. Here we chose to translate the word as “alteration”.

Editorial notes

This feature has been added by Lily to the aforementioned six features listed by Aelius Donatus in his Ars Minor.

Editorial notes

Ennius, Annals, XVII, 430, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Livius Andronicus, The Odyssey, 28–9 VIII, 378, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Nevius, Bellum poenicum, FRL VI; Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, XI.801-2. Latin Library: “nec aurae/ nec sonitus memor”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, XI.801-2. Latin Library: “nec aurae/ nec sonitus memor”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, XI, 285-6.

Editorial notes

Horace, Sermones, II, 179-80.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Andria, 2.2.365.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.198.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Pro Sestio Oratio, XII, 28, “Equites vero Romanos daturos illius diei poenas”. Lily is probably quoting from Gellius’ Noctes Atticae, 9.14.6-7: “Ciceronem quoque adfirmat Caesellius in oratione, quam Pro P. Sestio fecit, “dies” scripsisse pro “diei,” quod ego inpensa opera conquisitis veteribus libris plusculis ita, ut Caesellius ait, scriptum inveni. Verba sunt haec M. Tullii: “Equites vero daturos illius dies poenas””, The Attic Nights of Aulus Gellius. With An English Translation. John C. Rolfe. Cambridge. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press; London, William Heinemann, Ltd. 1927. Gellius’ work dates back to the 2nd century AD. It is a miscellany on grammar, rhetoric, etymology, and other sciences, where the author quotes different classical authors, thus representing a precious source for scholars since the Middle Ages.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Pro Sestio Oratio, XII, 28, “Equites vero Romanos daturos illius diei poenas”. Lily is probably quoting from Gellius’ Noctes Atticae, 9.14.6-7: “Ciceronem quoque adfirmat Caesellius in oratione, quam Pro P. Sestio fecit, “dies” scripsisse pro “diei,” quod ego inpensa opera conquisitis veteribus libris plusculis ita, ut Caesellius ait, scriptum inveni. Verba sunt haec M. Tullii: “Equites vero daturos illius dies poenas””, The Attic Nights of Aulus Gellius. With An English Translation. John C. Rolfe. Cambridge. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press; London, William Heinemann, Ltd. 1927. Gellius’ work dates back to the 2nd century AD. It is a miscellany on grammar, rhetoric, etymology, and other sciences, where the author quotes different classical authors, thus representing a precious source for scholars since the Middle Ages.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Aeneid, I.636. This quote can be read few lines after the above mentioned Cicero’s lines in Gellius’ Noctes Acticae (op. cit. 9.14.8)

Editorial notes

Sallust, Bellum Iughurtinum, 97. (In Gellius, 9.14.26).

Editorial notes

The architectural element to which Lily is referring is “pergamum”, a Latin word for “pulpit”.

Editorial notes

An interesting discussion on the words scelerata sinapis in a grammatical classical context, and its outcomes in Renaissance Italy, can be found in The Text of Plautus, Pseud. 817-18 and the Grammarians Flavius Caper and C. Iulius Romanus by Henry David Jocelyn, in: The Origins of European Scholarship: The Cyprus Millennium International Conference, ed. by Iōannēs G. Taiphakos, Franz Steiner Verlag, 2005, pp- 79-90.

An interesting discussion on the words scelerata sinapis in a grammatical classical context, and its outcomes in Renaissance Italy, can be found in The Text of Plautus, Pseud. 817-18 and the Grammarians Flavius Caper and C. Iulius Romanus by Henry David Jocelyn, in: The Origins of European Scholarship: The Cyprus Millennium International Conference, ed. by Iōannēs G. Taiphakos, Franz Steiner Verlag, 2005, pp- 79-90.

Editorial notes

An interesting discussion on the words scelerata sinapis in a grammatical classical context, and its outcomes in Renaissance Italy, can be found in The Text of Plautus, Pseud. 817-18 and the Grammarians Flavius Caper and C. Iulius Romanus by Henry David Jocelyn, in: The Origins of European Scholarship: The Cyprus Millennium International Conference, ed. by Iōannēs G. Taiphakos, Franz Steiner Verlag, 2005, pp- 79-90.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, V.383.

Editorial notes

Lucan, De Bello Civili Sive Pharsalia, VII, 217.

Editorial notes

An interesting discussion on the words scelerata sinapis in a grammatical classical context, and its outcomes in Renaissance Italy, can be found in The Text of Plautus, Pseud. 817-18 and the Grammarians Flavius Caper and C. Iulius Romanus by Henry David Jocelyn, in: The Origins of European Scholarship: The Cyprus Millennium International Conference, ed. by Iōannēs G. Taiphakos, Franz Steiner Verlag, 2005, pp- 79-90.

Editorial notes

“Ōkús” is the translitarated Greek word for fast, swift (ocis in Latin).

Editorial notes

The folios containing the following pages until page [K] excluded, are mixed up in the 1542 edition. They have been reorganised following the 1546 edition.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, I.74.

Editorial notes

Persius, Saturae, I.2.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, 987.

Editorial notes

Propertius, Elegiae, II.22b.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Eclogues, IX, 23-25.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Eclogues, IX, 23-25.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Letters to Atticus, VIII.2

Editorial notes

Martial, Epigrammaton, Book XV.CCXVII.

Editorial notes

Priscianus Caesariensis, Vth century AD, Latin grammarian.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, X-31-33.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, II.353.

Editorial notes

Thomas Linacre was Lily’s friend and very talented scholar, interested in Latin and Greek languages and grammars.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Atticum, VIII.2.4.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, I.14.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Tristia, I.IX.5-6. Here the word “donec” can be found instead of “si”.

Editorial notes

English maxim which can be found in different family coats of arms and mottos.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.446-7.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, XV.

Editorial notes

Lily use this Latin word ‘exactum’, which has been translated as ‘exact’, to refer to a future mood derived from the Greek, which corresponds to the English future perfect.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Andria, II.397.

Editorial notes

Pliny, Epistolae, VI.4.5.

Editorial notes

Greek word for “on board”.

Editorial notes

Greek word for “to run a ship to land, put a ship to shore”.

Editorial notes

Lorenzo Valla, humanist, literate and scholar from the XVth century, well known both in Italy and England.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I. 713.

Glosses

Plico

Glosses

Oleo

Glosses

Pung

Glosses

Pario

Glosses

Pasco

Glosses

Cano

Glosses

Placeo

Glosses

Pango

Glosses

Maneo

Glosses

Nosco

Editorial notes

i.e. "insanio"

Editorial notes

Justin, Historiarum Philippicarum In Epitomen Redacti A M. Iuniano Iustino, Book VII.11. “Athenas quoque erudiendi gratia missus”.

Editorial notes

Justin, Historiarum Philippicarum In Epitomen Redacti A M. Iuniano Iustino, Book VII.11. “Athenas quoque erudiendi gratia missus”.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Georgicon, III.215-16.

Editorial notes

Sallust, Bellum Iugurthinum, 5. “Quo ad cognoscendum omnia illustria”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogues, IX.53.

Editorial notes

Terence, Phormio, II.248.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, II.421.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, II. 99.

Editorial notes

Seneca, Naturales Quaestiones, VII.3,3. “Nullam autem mentionem fecit cometarum, non praetermissurus, si quid explorati apud illos comperisset”.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, 2.1.17. “Eiicienda hercle haec est mollities animi: nimis me indulgeo.”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, I.478.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, I.45.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, XIV.3.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Andria, I.277.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Quintum Fratrem, III.2.3.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.445-6.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Adelphoe, II.

Editorial notes

Horace, Ars Poetica, 379-80.

Editorial notes

Thomas de Aquino, Summa Theologiae, III.58.2.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Familiares, IV.12.2. “ Vulnus accepit in capite secundum aurem”.

Editorial notes

Suetonius, Vita Divi Augusti, 87, “cum aliquos numquam soluturos significare vult, "ad Kal. Graecas soluturos" ait”. Suetonius affirmed that the emperor August said this sentence to refer to people who did not want to pay for their debts. The metaphorical meaning is thus “never”, because the “Calendas”, Roman festivities, did not exist in the Greek calendar, and Roman people could not pay in a non existent date.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, IV.539.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, III.136.

Editorial notes

A proverb often used for emblems.

Editorial notes

Horace, Sermonum, I.1.106-7.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Tristia, III.3.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Tristia, III.3.

Editorial notes

Pliny the Elder, Naturalis Historia, Praefatio, 7. “et M. Tullius extra omnem ingenii aleam positus”.

Editorial notes

This quote can be found in Uguccione da Pisa, Derivationes, C 201.14 “Circum tantum est locale, quasi undique, ut 'circum montem'”. Dante Medieval Archives. https://dama.dantenetwork.it/   

Editorial notes

“Sen. Prov. 5,9. – Prov.: “contra stimulum calces,” kick against the pricks, Isid. Orig. 1, 36, 28 (al. calcitres);”, in the definition of “contra”, A Latin Dictionary. Founded on Andrews' edition of Freund's Latin dictionary. revised, enlarged, and in great part rewritten by. Charlton T. Lewis, Ph.D. and. Charles Short, LL.D. Oxford. Clarendon Press. 1879.

Editorial notes

Proverb by Decimus Laberius. Stone, Jon R. The Routledge dictionary of Latin quotations: the illiterati's guide to Latin maxims, mottoes, proverbs, and sayings. Routledge, 2013, p.63.

Editorial notes

Terence, Aeunuchus, III.2.489-90. “tace tu, quem te ego esse infra infimos omnis puto/ homines”.

Editorial notes

Salust, Bellum Catilinae, 52.24.

Editorial notes

Varro, De Vita Populi Romani, I.12.1. https://latin.packhum.org

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.I.45-6.

Editorial notes

Terence, Phormio, V.768.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Mercator, IV.4.772.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.53-4.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Fasti, I.119.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.XI.27.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Eclogae, III.60.

Editorial notes

Proverb by Decimus Laberius. Stone, Jon R. The Routledge dictionary of Latin quotations: the illiterati's guide to Latin maxims, mottoes, proverbs, and sayings. Routledge, 2013, p.63.

Editorial notes

Terence, Adelphoe. “Abs quiuis homine, quomst opus, beneficium accipere gaudeas”.

Editorial notes

Terence, Phormio, I.188.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Truculentus, II.1. 248.

Editorial notes

Proverb by Publilius Syrus. Jon R. Stone, op. cit. p. 16.

Editorial notes

Terence Adelphoe.

980.

Editorial notes

Silius Italicus, Punica, IX.382.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Fasti, I.298.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, III.402.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Aeneid, III.431.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Eclogae, I.79.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Aeneid, IX.514.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Menaechmi, 127.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Aeneid, X, 507.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, I.1.46.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, IV.6.756-7.

Editorial notes

Martial, Epigrams, II.27. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Adelphoe, V.891.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Eunuchus, V.9.1053.

Editorial notes

Seneca, Naturales Quaestiones, VII.3,3. “Nullam autem mentionem fecit cometarum, non praetermissurus, si quid explorati apud illos comperisset”.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Adelphoe, IV.II.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Eunuchus, V.6,1008.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Eunuchus, IV.4,14.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.251. “navibus (infandum!) amissis”.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Epistulae, Ad Atticum, II.2.

Editorial notes

After an explanation on the eight parts of speech and the grammatical elements necessary to build a sentence, in this section Lily aims to explain how to put these elements together and make a proper grammatical construction.

Editorial notes

Seneca the Younger, Agamennon, 242.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Hecyra, III.3.406. “O fortuna, ut numquam perpetuo's data!”.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Adelphoe. “Tu es patronus, tu pater:/ tibi moriens ille nos commendauit senex:/ si deseris tu, periimus”.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoriae, II.592. “Teque ferunt artis paenituisse tuae”.

Editorial notes

Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, II.4.400.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Epistulae ex Ponto, II.IX.47-48.

Editorial notes

It seems to be a reference to Procellio Pandone, very prolific Italian humanist from the XVth century. Poemata et Epigrammata, XVIII. Poeta gaudet quod per omnem Italiam principles divum P‹etrum› summon honore complexi sunt, v.15 “Gaudeo te incolumem primum rediisse Quirini”. Di Meo, Anna, La silloge Poemata et epigrammata di Porcelio de' Pandoni. Edizione critica, traduzione e commento, Università degli Studi di Napoli Federico II, 2017.

Editorial notes

It seems to be a reference to Cicero, De Divinatione, II.VI.15 “de quibus singulis dicam suo loco”.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Satyres, VI.165. This sentence probably gave life to a common saying, for which a “rare bird” refers to an unusual person, which can be found also in Erasmus’ Adagia (II.I.21).

Editorial notes

Ovid, Tristia, I.IX.5.

Editorial notes

Ibid. I.IX.10.

Editorial notes

Seneca the Younger, Fabulae, Octavia, vv. 651-2.

Editorial notes

Doroberniam is the ancient name of Canterbury in Roman England. “In other editions of the syntax the examples were also adapted to the period of the impression; as in that of 1520, "Audito Regem Doroberniam proficisci," I hear that the King has set out to Canterbury, referring to Henry's rapid journey to that city to meet the Emperor Charles V.” Londina Illustrata. Graphic and Historical Memorials of Monasteries, Churches, Chapels, Schools, Charitable Foundations, Palaces, Halls, Courts, Processions, Places of Early Amusement, and Modern Present Theatres, in the Cities and Suburbs of London and Westminster, Volume 2 Wilkinson, Robert, 1819-1825.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistles, I.XVI.40-1.

Editorial notes

Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, II.2.364-5.

Editorial notes

Valerius Maximus, Factorum et dictorum memorabilium, Book II.2.6.

Editorial notes

Pomponius Mela, De Chorographia, III.10.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Natura Deorum, II.52. “propius a terra Iovis stella fertur, quae Faeqwn dicitur”. In the Loeb Edition we can read: “propius a terra Iovis stella fertur quae Φαέθων dicitur”. This Greek word “Φαέθων” is sometimes translated in Latin as “Faeqwn”, but in Thomas Linacre’s De emendata structura latini sermonis libri sex, 1529, we can find “Phaeton”.

Editorial notes

Reference to Cicero, De Re Publica, VI.15 “Homines enim sunt hac lege generati, qui tuerentur illum globum, quem in hoc templo medium vides, quae terra dicitur”.

Editorial notes

Sallust, Bellum Catilinae, 55.3.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, I.97-98.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, V.

Editorial notes

Boethius, De Consolatione Philosophiae, II.1-2.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ex Ponto, III.IV.52 “gratiaque officio quod mora tardat abest”.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Satirae, XIV.139.

Editorial notes

Lucan, Bello Civile, II.388.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, I.140

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, I.140

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.168.

Editorial notes

Catullo, Carme XXII.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Satyres, III.143-4.

Editorial notes

Terenzio Adelphoe, IV.II.

Editorial notes

Horace, Saturae I.9.35, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, II.357.

Editorial notes

Lily seems to play with Cicero, Epistulae, Ad Familiares, I.7.11 “Lentulum nostrum, eximia spe summae virtutis adulescentem”, swapping “Lentulum” with the “Edouardum” the Prince, and thus “adulescentem” with “principem”.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, XI.154

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Brutum, I.15.12. “Tua nobis auctoritate opus est”.

Editorial notes

Gellius, Noctis Atticae, I.14.2.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, II.6.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Atticum, VI.9.2.

Editorial notes

Terentius, Heauton Timorumenos, IV.8. “quae opus sunt comparet”.

Editorial notes

Pliny the Elder, Historia Naturale, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, v.911.

Editorial notes

Lily refers to Johannes Despauterius (c.1480-1520), Latinized name for Jan de Spauter, Flemish umanist who worked and published on Latin grammar, writing some of the most used books for the study of Latin, as Syntaxis, Ars versificatoria, Grammatica pars prima and Ortographia.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Officiis I.1.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, I.32.

Editorial notes

Terence, Hecyra, III.1.293. “an quisquam usquam gentiumst aeque miser?”.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoria, I.204.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Fasti, I.66.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, 2.40.

Editorial notes

Cassiodorus, XII.II.4, “quia bonarum rerum nulla satietas est”.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.1.52.

Editorial notes

Catullus, IL. ad Marcum Tullium Ciceronem.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, VIII. 140-1.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Eclogue V.65.

Editorial notes

Martial, Epigrams, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Oratore, I.XVI.70.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, II.541.

Editorial notes

Lucan, Belli Civili, X.382.

Editorial notes

Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, II.1.213-15. “Quam iniqui sunt patres in omnis adulescentis iudices!/ qui aequom esse censent nos a pueris ilico nasci senes/ neque illarum adfinis esse rerum quas fert adulescentia”.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, III.1.496.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Fasti, IV. 311. “conscia mens recti”.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Aeneid, XII.659-60.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Officiis, I.11.

Editorial notes

Salust, Bellum Catilinae, 40.5. “Neque aliena consili”.

Editorial notes

Seneca, Quaestiones Naturales, IV.1.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Atticum, IV.16.3.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, VIII.690-1.

Editorial notes

Pliny Maior, Naturalis Historia, XVII Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Pliny Maior, Naturalis Historia, Book VI.217 Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Columella, Res Rustica, 2.10.26. In: Columella, Lucius Junius Moderatus, On Agriculture, Volume 1. Harrison Boyd Ash. London. Cambridge. William Heinemann; Harvard University. 1940.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Cistellaria, I.1.69.

Editorial notes

Horace, Sermonum, I.2.13.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.180-1.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneidos, I.460.

Editorial notes

Persius, Saturae, II.62.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria I.98.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon IV.183.

Editorial notes

This sentence is quoted both in Francesco Petrarca, Bucolicum Carmen, IV. 68, Il Bucolicon Carmen e i suoi commenti inediti, edizione curata e illustrata da A. Avena, Padova, Soc. Coop. Tipografica, 1906, and in Battista Mantovano, Adulescentia, 46, ed. by Lee Piepho, New York – London, Garland Publishing, 1989.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, XVII.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, VII.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Atticum, XI.15.2.

Editorial notes

Livy, Ad Urbe Condita, VII.9.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, II.1.214-5.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides XIV.

Editorial notes

Probably an ancient proverb. We can read in Vergil, Aeneidos, VI.852-3: “pacique imponere morem,

parcere subiectis et debellare superbos.”.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Pro Balbo, 34.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Fasti, I.197.

Editorial notes

The Latin word “teruncius, teruncii” (three ounces) refers to an ancient coin, similar to the “quadrans”. It can be used figuratively for a penny of for the fourth part of an inheritance, being the fourth part of the bronze coin as for the Roman coin “as”, or “assarius”.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, XIV.14.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Remedia Amoris, 3.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, II.1.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, IV.10.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneidos, II.144.

Editorial notes

Statius, Thebaid, I.281.

Editorial notes

Seneca, De Vita Beata, I.24.1.

Editorial notes

Boethius, De Consolatione Philosophiae, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Tusculanae Disputationes, III.30.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Captivi, 800. “Faciam ut huius diei locique meique semper meminerit.”.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Senectute, VII.21.

Editorial notes

Sallust, Bellum Iugurthinum, 74.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Epidicus, II.1.265.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Egloca III.103.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, I.47-8.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, X.294.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Philippicae, VI.7.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Captivi, IV.3.906.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, I.23.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Atticum, IX.11.3.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, II.2.271-2.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, V.8.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.10.47. Also Venerabilis Bedae, Presbyteri Proverbiorum Liber, H. And Albertano of Brescia, De amore et dilectione aliarum rerum corporalium liber III.

Editorial notes

Salust, Bellum Catilinae, 2.7.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, II. 312.

Editorial notes

Persius, Saturae III, v.64.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Metamorphoses, VIII.73.

Editorial notes

Terence, Adelphoe.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, XV.164.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, III.31.

Editorial notes

Horace, Carmina, III.16.42-3.

Editorial notes

Erasmus’ explanation of a proverb in his Adagia: “A gallo candido abstineas Ἀλεκτρυόνος μὴ ἅπτεσθαι λευκοῦ, id est Albo gallo ne manum admoliaris quod Mensi sacer sit, utpote horarum nuntius.”. Les Adages d’Érasme, présentés par les Belles Lettres et le GRAC (UMR 5037), 2010, p.80.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, 69.70. “interea mulier quaedam abhinc triennium/ ex Andro commigravit huc viciniae”.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Casina, II.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Casina, II.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, VI.6.

Editorial notes

Terence, Phormio, V.908.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, 250.

Editorial notes

Columella, De Re Rustica, III.16. “deinceps pastinato malleolus ordinariis vitibus interserendus est”.

Editorial notes

Persius, Saturae, V.53.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogues, III.33.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.12.4.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.18.69.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.18.69.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Cato Maior De Senectute, 10.31. “idetisne, ut apud Homerum saepissime Nestor de virtutibus suis praedicet? Tertiam iam enim aetatem hominum videbat”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, IV.467.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.328.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, II.3.

Editorial notes

Horace, Sermonum, I.2.27 and I.4.92.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, IV.50.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, XI.358.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, XI.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, VII.20. “Bassus noster me de hoc libro celavit”.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistolae, I.10.24.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, X.130.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistolae, I.2.57.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoria, II.669-70.

Editorial notes

Livy, Ab Urbe Condita, XXIII.30. “Multo sanguine ac volneribus ea Poenis victoria stetit”.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, I.

Editorial notes

Varro, De Lingua Latina, V.36.

Editorial notes

Valerius Maximus, Factorvm et Dictorvm Memorabilivm Libri Novem, VII.2.ext.9.

Editorial notes

Salust, Bellum Catilinae, 51.34.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, II.20.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, V.890.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.215.

Editorial notes

Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, II.4.400.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Officiis, II.43.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Captivi, II.2.202.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, IV.52.

Vergil, Eclogae, IV.52.

Editorial notes

Caesar, De Bello Gallico, I.14.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistolae, I.1.100. “diruit, aedificat, mutat quadrata rotundis?”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.335.

Editorial notes

Macrobius, Saturnalia, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Miles Gloriosus, I.1.51.

Editorial notes

Tacitus, Historiae, I.16.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistolae, II.2.213.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, XVII.

Editorial notes

Virgil, Aeneid, II.289.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, VI.1-2.

Editorial notes

Horace, Odes, “Nil desperandum Teucro duce et auspice Teucro”. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Epidicus, III.1.326.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Aulularia, I.2.105.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Aulularia, I.2.105.

Editorial notes

Horace, Sermones, I.2.11.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Officiis, III.38. “honesta enim bonis viris, non occulta quaeruntur.”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.326.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistolae, I.11.9.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VI.487-8.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, IV.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, II.98.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoria, III.65.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, II.114-5.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, I.26.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.177.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, IV.553.

Editorial notes

Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, Prologus, 27-8.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Amicitia, 100. “ex quo exardescit sive amor sive amicitia; utrumque enim dictum est ab amando”.

Editorial notes

Quintilian, Institutio Oratoria, I.4.3.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Aulularia, III.3.456.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Imperio, 1.

Editorial notes

Cicero, In Verrem, II.78. “a quo pecuniam ob absolvendum acceperis condemnare”.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, X.356.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.205.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoria, I.99.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Aulularia, III.3.457.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, I.177.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.272.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VI.127.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, I.79.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, III.104.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.479.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Brutus, 1. “Cum e Cilicia decedens Rhodum venissem”.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, III.41.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.107.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Officiis, I.76.

Editorial notes

Suetonius, Gaius, 8.

Editorial notes

Livy, Ab Urbe Condita, V.8.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.VIII.12.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, I.VIII.12.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Philippicae, 76.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiarem, VII.11.

Editorial notes

Sallust, Bellum Catilinae, 20.9.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Tristia, II.1.

Editorial notes

Cato, De Agri Cultura, 2.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Cato Maior De Senectute, 19.

Editorial notes

Plautus, Trinummus, II.4.431.

Editorial notes

Terence, Adelphoe.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, IV.2.

Editorial notes

Quintilian, Institutio Oratoria, VII.1.1.

Editorial notes

Quintilian, Institutio Oratoria, VII.1.1.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.93-4.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, IV.21-2 “ipsae lacte domum referent distenta capellae/ ubera nec magnos metuent armenta leones”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, III.608.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, XV.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.461.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, V.66.

Editorial notes

Apuleius, Metamorphoses, III.4.

Editorial notes

Salust, Bellum Catilinae, 5.4.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, II.15-6.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, II.

Editorial notes

Justin, Historiarum Philippicarum, XXXVI.2.2.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, I.29.

Editorial notes

Livy, Ab Urbe Condita, XXVIII.14. “Plus quingentos passus acies inter sese aberant”.

Editorial notes

Terence, Hecyra, III.4.421.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VI.628; X.632; XII.81.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, III.5.596.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, III.77.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, VI.3.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Amicitia, 1.

Editorial notes

Salust, Bellum Catilinae, 7.4.

Editorial notes

Horace, Sermones, I.9.34.

Editorial notes

Cicero, De Oratore, II.LXV.261.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, VIII.40-1.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VI.544.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, IV.7.785.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Satires, Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, X.22.

Editorial notes

Biblia Sacra Vulgata, Apocalypsis 3.15.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, IV.648.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, VII.17.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, II.12.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, I.38.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoria, II.279.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Atticum, XII.41.

Editorial notes

Terence, Eunuchus, I.49 and Horace, Sermones, II.3.264.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, III.55.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Fasti, III.169.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, I.80.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, I.190.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, 914.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Atticum, XII.23.3.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, III.521.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.48.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, II.493.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.145.

Editorial notes

Terence, Phormio, II.313.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, 8. “de tua fama detrahere umquam cogitassem”.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Pro Sulla, 83.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, I.51.

Editorial notes

Cicero, Ad Familiares, X.1.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, I.

Editorial notes

Livy, Ab Urbe Condita, I.22.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.662.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epistulae, VI.24.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VI.794-5.

Editorial notes

Tacitus, Annales, XI.23.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, IX.514.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, I.29.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.595.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.15.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, II.458-9.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, II.17.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VI.878.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VII.293.

Editorial notes

Quintilian, Institutiones, IX.14 “Figura sit arte aliqua novata forma dicendi”.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, I. “turba ruunt in me luxuriosa proci”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.168.

Editorial notes

This sentence can be also found in Giovanni Sulpizio Verulano, Regulae grammaticales, Venezia 1500 ff36 – 37: “Evocatio est continuata reductio tertiae personae ad primam vel secundam, ut ‘ego Quintilianus declamo, tu Cicero oras’”.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.292-3.

Editorial notes

Horace, Are Poetica, v.153.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, III.12-13.

Editorial notes

Sallust, Bellum Iugurthinum, 68. “Ira et aegritudo permista sunt”.

Editorial notes

Liber Psalmorum, 22.4.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Ars Amatoria, II.580.

Ovid, Ars Amatoria, II.580.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, I.2.

Editorial notes

Lily is here refering to Diomedes Grammaticus, Latin grammarian from the fourth century AD, whose works had been printed in Italy in the first part of the sixteenth century.

Editorial notes

Cicero, In Catilinam, I.1.

Editorial notes

Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, V.4.1022.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, VIII.67.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Remedia Amoris, 591.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, VI.660.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, I.573.

Vergil, Aeneid, I.573.

Editorial notes

Terence, Andria, Prologus, 3.

Editorial notes

Pliny, Naturalis Historia. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, III.81.

Editorial notes

Lucan, Belli Civilis, II.335.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Georgicon, IV.34.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, XII.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, IV.64

Editorial notes

Vergil, Ecligae, X.69.

Editorial notes

In the original latin text it is likely that Lily made a mistake in writing ‘quatuor’, four, instead of a Latin word (probably ‘tribus’) meaning three, as ‘Hephthemimer’ in the Greek and Latin Poetry is a kind of verse consisting of three feet and a syllable, that is, of seven half feet.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, V.521.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, VI.53.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, I.1.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Eclogae, IV.49. “Cara deum suboles, magnum Iovis incrementum”.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, I.

Editorial notes

Horace, Odes, I.1.1.

Editorial notes

Horace, Odes, I.2.1.

Editorial notes

Horace, Odes, I.22.1-4.

Editorial notes

This sentence can be found in Poliziano, Epigrammata 50, 16-17. Ed. by I. Del Lungo, 1867.

Editorial notes

Horace, Epodes, XVI.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, II.3.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, VI.229.

Editorial notes

Juvenal, Saturae, VI. 41.

Editorial notes

Probably from Hebraic.

Editorial notes

Ovid, Heroides, XV.

Editorial notes

If you love learning, you will be erudite.

Editorial notes

Nevius, Bellum poenicum, FRL VI; Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

Vergil, Aeneid, XI.801-2. Latin Library: “nec aurae/ nec sonitus memor”.

Editorial notes

Terence Heauton Timorumenos 2.2.287. In The Latin Library: "(ei(u)s anui' causa".

Editorial notes

An interesting discussion on the words scelerata sinapis in a grammatical classical context, and its outcomes in Renaissance Italy, can be found in The Text of Plautus, Pseud. 817-18 and the Grammarians Flavius Caper and C. Iulius Romanus by Henry David Jocelyn, in: The Origins of European Scholarship: The Cyprus Millennium International Conference, ed. by Iōannēs G. Taiphakos, Franz Steiner Verlag, 2005, pp- 79-90.

Editorial notes

A proverb often used for emblems.

Editorial notes

This letter to the schoolmasters was translated from Latin by Maddalena Repetto and Lara Nicolini.

Editorial notes

This letter to the reader was translated from Latin by Maddalena Repetto and Lara Nicolini.

Editorial notes

The next two pages, until page {E}, are missing in the 1542 edition. They have been entirely taken from the 1543 edition.

ToC